Home

Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service User Manual

1. Details ODSS5004E Internal test program error A user interaction at Please perform the test again or contact Support tempt was made which is only permitted within a test step This test will be cancelled ODS5S005E Document could not be loaded Please contact Support ODSS5006E Unable to determine the knowledge base for the Please contact Support vehicle Guided fault finding is not possible for this vehicle Details ODSS5007E A version problem in test has been detected Please contact Support ODSS008E Decompression of test program failed due to Please contact Support a missing or invalid compression The test pro gram could not be loaded ODS5S009E _ Decoding of test program failed due to a miss Please contact Support ing or invalid code The test program could not be loaded 340 Error messages ODSSO10E The signature check of test program failed due Please contact Support to a missing or manipulated signature The test program could not be loaded ODSS5501E Control unit could not be found Please contact Support ODS5502E Connection could not be opened Please contact Support ODS5503E Connection could not be generated Please contact Support ODSS5504E Unexpected result during control unit communi Please contact Support cation method ODSS5505E Control unit communication not possible Please contact Support
2. Connection to Central control module for comfort s Connection toDiagnostic interface for databus Preparation steps TheDiagnostic interface for databusis the only control module with the intermittent DTC entryCentral control module for convenience system Preparation steps No communication Preallocation control modules How do you want to proceed Preallocation control modules Brealiocation for evaluating he Fa 2 Read out the measured values for the CAN bus connections Preallocation for evaluating the FSP Selection model Connector names for GolffRabbit Gc End modules Evaluating DTC memory Evaluating DTC memory Evaluating DTC memory Preparation steps Connection toDiagnostic interface fo is Mm gt lt gt Figure 6 73 Buttons for selecting alternative test steps As shown above in the example use the numbered buttons here 1 and 2 to select the required action To receive the next instructions for troubleshooting click on the 2 button as shown in the example TheDiagnostic interface for databusis the only control module with the intermittent DTC entryCentral control module for convenience system No communication How do you want to proceed Check the CAN bus signals with the DSO measurement Read out the measured values for the CAN bus connections E Figure 6 74 Displaying the selected test step The 2 button has been selected in this example you can recognise it by t
3. Komfort THR_72 LWR_55 EPH_76 SVF 3 J LRE_16 REI 65 AHF Z 4 70 ZBT M3P_2E NAV_37 Infotainment k A Vehicle Position Detection Block diagram Control unit list Event memory list Figure 6 35 View of the block diagram To open a graphical overview of the current block diagram in the overall view click on the Block diagram button The block diagram displays the control unit network of the full options package Clicking on a control unit symbol displays a message text with the system name of the control unit under the block diagram Several buttons that can be used to navigate in the block diagram are available below it 73 Diagnostic mode From left to right 2 Switching to the overall view of the block diagram If you have zoomed in on the block diagram and would like to return to the overall view click on this button 2 Zooming in on the block diagram Each time you click on this button the block diagram s size increases and you can recognise further details If the button is not active the block diagram is at maximum zoom size 2 Zooming out of the block diagram x Click on this button to zoom out of the block diagram This button is not enabled in the overall view of the block diagram 2 Moving the block diagram 3 To move the block diagram click on this button After activating the button click on the block diagram and move it in the desired direction using y
4. 2 The user interface in test instruments mode consists of the following six areas ntormation area j Or bar The tabs on the tab bar can be used to activate the Multimeter or Oscilloscope client area 196 Test Instruments mode gt Reference See also chapter The Multimeter client area and The Oscilloscope client area ion area The structure of the client area changes depending on which function has been activated using the tabs All specific test parameters for the selected measurement option are displayed in this client area gt Reference See also Fig Structure of the Multimeter client area and Fig Structure of the Oscilloscope client area Ovodes By clicking on the buttons you can switch to Info Diagnosis and Admin mode at all times The most recently set measurement options and functions remain intact when switching modes gt Reference See also Test instrument administration standarad functions Onote To print the current screen view click on the Data button in the Standard functions area To hide the Information area Oana the modes Oaa to zoom in on the other areas click on the Full screen Ei uton Ostatus line Status messages from the system are displayed in the status line The default settings for test instruments mode such as units of measurement can only be set in Admin mode gt Reference See also chapter Test instrument administration 9 2 T
5. Figure 3 1 Starting the installation Cancel Click on this button to cancel the installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service The desired language needs to be selected for the installation Figure 3 2 Language selection for installation To select the language click on the pop up menu to set the language you require for Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service German is shown as the default language OK The selection is confirmed Cancel The installation is terminated After selecting the language a message appears asking you to close any programs still open Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 Joe Welcome to the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Setup Wizard This will install Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service on your computer Itis recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup Figure 3 3 The Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Setup wizard 17 Installation Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is continued Cancel The installation is terminated 2 Note To ensure that Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is installed correctly close any open programs before installing Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Now specify the target folder for the installation Set
6. If you then reduce the selection to actuators and and click on a only the actuators and are stopped while actuator Ocontinues Mutually independent actuators may be started and stopped at all times The Hi button can be used to also perform a sequential actuator test for a UDS control unit For this no other actuator test may be active In addition exactly one actuator must be selected in the list on the left If both conditions are fulfilled the button is enabled 157 Diagnostic mode Click on IR to switch to the next actuator and click on gt to start the test for this actuator If the end of the list has been reached clicking on Hib takes you to the first list entry The measured values of the currently performed actuator test are opened Click on the Fal to stop the currently active actuator test The sequential actuator test can be continued with ID and gt The test is started with the currently selected actuator regardless of at which point the test was interrupted Special features when using the keyboard Some settings can also be made using shortcuts with the keyboard The following shortcuts are available CTRL A Selects all entries in a table Tab key For views with two selection lists switches between the two lists CTRL left arrow For views with two selection lists moves an element from the right hand list to the left hand list CTRL right arrow For views with two selection lists moves an
7. Application start user interface Fr Data Curent view 8 Print Diagnostic log oy Send k Save W Frint D Copy a Send ext Diagnostic session Stop Hatfix 4 Get Delete Figure 5 8 Data submenu to print screenshots to send save print and copy diagnostic protocols to interrupt diagnostic sessions and resume them later on to download hotfixes gt Reference See also chapter Data 2 Note The menus on the right side are opened and closed again by clicking on the M des name row Modes The following Extras submenu includes the following Extras a Searching veal Test drive Figure 5 9 Extras submenu Application start user interface e The search function e The option of changing the diagnostic hardware Vehicle Communication Interface VCI Test drive mode Cy Reference See also Extras chapter Via the following Help submenu the following functions are available oF Help Online help Support Figure 5 10 Help submenu e Online help Feedback function for support queries Reference See also Help chapter The following Info submenu includes the following Br Info ao New features lagi Versions AN Warning wO Caution Mote Figure 5 11 Info submenu Information on new functions under New features e Information on software and data versions e Attention caution and note information
8. Copy certificate to the installation Folder Figure 3 10 Selecting the certificate Browse The storage location of the license dat file can be searched for in the Windows file directory An example of the storage location for the certificate is C Licences Micense dat To automatically transfer the name of the storage location to the text field click on the certificate file license dat Copy certificate to the installation folder If this option is ticked the certificate is copied into the default instal lation folder Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is installed without certificate file if there is no tick Then it needs to be installed before starting the program for the first time The default installation folder for the licence file 1s C Program Files Offboard_Diagnostic_Information_System_Service license license dat 23 Installation Back Go back in the installation process one step Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is continued Cancel The installation is terminated Now select the name of the start menu folder Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is used by default If you do not wish to create a directory in the start menu tick the checkbox Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 Mex Select Start Menu Folder AT Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts F Select the Stark Menu Folder in which y
9. Fields on the right with an are mandatory fields that must be completed so that manual customer codes can be added to the test plan The General boundary conditions field includes boundary conditions not assigned directly to the customer code If completed it will not be possible to find any diagnostic objects for the current customer code 94 Diagnostic mode 6 3 3 Special functions In addition to the test plan in guided fault finding further test programs of the same name are available on the Special functions tab Special functions are vehicle specific test programs They are not selected via basic characteristics or control units in the context of diagnostic start up Instead they are provided from the database for individual vehicles To display tests available for the overall vehicle click on the Special functions tab in Diagnostics mode 2 Note In Flash mode after vehicle and control unit identification the flash programs available for the vehicle are listed on the Special functions tab There is no test plan in this mode gt Reference See also chapter Using flash programs Examples of special functions in Diagnostics mode are Code immobiliser and Transport protection n n Control units Orders plss TP Test plan Process Special functions Tests forthe complete vehicle Status Tests Code control module online Conversionrretrofitting campaign Software adapting SY
10. Figure 6 124 UDS default setting Selection of the default settings The desired default settings need to be selected from the initial view of the function The available settings are displayed in the left hand list The right hand list contains the selected settings It is empty to start with gt Moves the selected default settings from the left hand list into the right hand list gt Moves all default settings into the right hand list 140 Diagnostic mode Moves the selected default settings from the right hand list into the left hand list amp Moves all default settings into the left hand list The list of selected default settings can be sorted To do this select exactly one default setting from the right hand list P Moves the entry up one position Y Moves the entry down one position Ep Switches to the next view Parametrisation Parametrisation Control units Results Orders Frocess 17 Dash Board UDSFISOTF SC0320872ZB 7 0206 X017 EV KombiUDS_VOD_RMOs 404040 Sueeweneusseuetneusneseeeetenseeraeereeneneresertenenenerettraenenererttnanenesnnttfusenesenessenenerantsssnesersstres abe M Parameters Value Unit Resetting of all adaptation values i LO Reset of Adaption Values PO All adaption valdes Default parameter gt 17 BAS p d Figure 6 125 UDS default setting Parametrisation Default parameters To set all parameters to th
11. With this measuring function a user defined time interval can be set during which the measurement is performed After recording has taken place the measuring curves are output across the width of the window in compressed form The use of the long term measurement is explained in the following sub items 2 Parametrisation of the long term measurement To display the corresponding parametrisation dialogue in the operating area click on the Long term measure ment button in the function area The Freeze frame function is automatically activated during parametrisation Multimeter Osciloscope os ra Figure 9 18 Parametrisation of long term measurements 2 Setting the measuring duration 223 Test Instruments mode After clicking on the buttons with the Minutes or Hours caption the blue arrow buttons at the side can be used to increase or reduce the measuring time If the maximum or minimum time interval is reached the corresponding button is disabled black The elapsed recording time is output in the top right part of the display area The measuring time remains the same if the measurement is repeated 2 Setting the timebase The procedure for setting the timebase is similar to the procedure described in the chapter Image position and timebase The set timebase in the long term measurement function is saved independently of the timebase for the other measuring modes Onote The maximum measuring time fo
12. e Alternating current measuring range 0 5A 0 10A I 0 50A 10 100A I e Automatic or manual measuring range selection e Functions freeze frame minimum maximum calibration 2 Note The first time the measurement option is started you will be requested to perform calibration Current measure ment cannot be started as long as the information text Calibration in progress is shown at the top of the display area Do not clamp the clamp on ammeter to live wires during calibration If the clamp on ammeter is open the warning Clamp on ammeter not closed will appear in the display area but the running measurement will not be interrupted For this reason always check that the clamp on ammeter fits correctly before starting a long term measurement for example 210 Test Instruments mode Onote For measurements with the clamp on ammeter perform manual calibration again after changing from low to high current due to magnetisation effects The maximum possible measuring range for a connected clamp on ammeter is automatically identified and the corresponding test parameters are adjusted 9 2 8 Pressure measurement via T P device socket 2 To activate the Pressure T P measuring function depending on the device also Pressure T P 1 use the button of the same name Multimeter oscitoscope Figure 9 12 Client area for activated Pressure T P pressure measurement For the pressure measurement
13. 274 Administration mode e All consists of all log contents listed here This is the largest file Its transmission may therefore take the longest time e Information consists of log contents with information e Warnings consists of log contents with warnings e Errors consists of log contents with errors Fatal errors consists of log contents with fatal errors The scope of the log information entered increases from Fatal errors to All A detailed log output may reduce the performance Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 275 Administration mode 2 General system environment This section informs you about system settings of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Radon Brand design Details about System environment Application directory Language Directory Update Versions System logging Software version Licence information caine i Data version Gi AES i Database Global configuration DIDB DB basis GFF sequence ECF Version MCD server Manufacturer Name Version API version PDU API Manufacturer Version API version Figure 11 8 System environmen
14. for file You do not have the necessary access rights Please contact Support ODS3004E No space to write file The data carrier is full Please contact your sys tem administrator or Support ODS3005E File folder could not be found Check that the path is correct or contact Support ODS3006E lIncorrect file format for file Format was Please contact Support expected ODS3007E File in file folder cannot be processed or Please contact Support written ODS3008E File in file folder cannot be opened or read Please contact Support ODS3009E File cannot be copied to Please contact Support ODS3010E Filter file for HexService not available or not Please contact Support legible The hex service function cannot be executed ODS3011E An error occurred while displaying the result of Please contact Support the build status test ODS3012E An error occurred while generating the html re Please contact Support sult log ODS3501E Connection data to Group systems is incorrect or Please contact Support does not exist Please contact Support ODS4001E The data structure could not be created or con Please contact Support verted Please contact Support ODS4002E The software library could not be found Please contact Support ODS4003E The software library could not be opened Please contact Support ODS4004E The parameters received for calli
15. gt There is no diagnostic connection No diagnostic connection is identified There is a network connection fa There is a network connection i X There is no network connection Whether the ignition is switched on The ignition is switched on re The ignition is switched off The ignition status is not identified 2 Note Without a network connection there is no connection to the Group systems Functions depending on this such as flashing and TPI can then not be used Client area The client area is the main part of the application All relevant data available during diagnosis and testing such as block diagrams test plans and test results is displayed here In addition all file entries are made here such as entering measured values in tests selecting test steps and identifying individual control units Each mode has its own tab bar in the client area with various tabs Depending on the type and scope of the session individual tabs are enabled Inactive tabs without content are greyed out Application start user interface Tab bar for Flash mode Flash Orders Special functions Operation Tab bar for Diagnostic mode Control modules Test plan Operation Special functions Diss Orders Tab bar for Info mode Documents Campaigns History Wiring diagrams Manuals Vehicle PR Ae
16. 10 2 3 13 Korean 10 2 3 13 1 English OOBOBOOHO99009CD See U el DU OODOUDDDODO UZVIVOTIIOVE I EDES CI EB JIOSHHIHIIIDIIITI SWE TIT I SETI WSOC OIWOOUWE a IVIVIWNWITTE ooL CH EB 252 eh 9990 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 13 2 Hangul SY OOOO HH OHH Fae JWAIMYAIPG VIIVIIIEY Yew eS Ao a a ao ote le JS Br RENNEN EN Sool DWAJA OVEL SI DIINO EDOOOOOOOOSOD je JIU JU UW 10 2 3 14 Croatian DOaawaonaooDanc Sal UL I JI IIIIIIIIAIIOIE I UL JJ DOOmOwmaODO0ODGOOC STII ITI IETS IWS OOOH IWOOO a VIIIIIIIIIE I OD SEI I DE 253 Virtual keyboard manual JIIITIIIITIII II HI a III UIIIIIEI 999 VVU DDL ED 10 2 3 15 Dutch SDIIHIIDIIOHITT Se ee anonDOnDDD TIIIIITTFITIIIE I AltGr JYVMAVM9 JY IIOIOIAIW J en ae WII TOCW WOON 0D 0 IVONWOONE I UL Ce sevevovugnnensas JOJOLO 20000000000 SDa 200000000000 DAO EB 254 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 16 Polish IOIIHIIDIIOIITI JI I anOWDWODDWL JIIIIAIINE _ UL JJ ITISHIHHAHIDIIITI WIIIIIINID VIIETHIRTIT I IV IIWIIIE 7 SS SS J OOOO 0000000000000 EC ee Ke NI DODDDDDDODDC JJETSIITIIITIE I SI EI IIIEFJIIIIIIII II e JS EB 2 YOO 0 EB 255 a 90 HDD Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 17 Portuguese DoaawoonaooDawc LET WIEIOGOVIVVWOOTO 3985 TIDGWIIVOTAOIOOE I DLL Cc DoomaDODDaaC YI ITI WITH IWIWNOOIOS BIJI OVANIE I JE J
17. 318 SN e i EE a seele enkelsikie 321 WS Ve ODIDE ED Sad a ol a ll erst 322 325 12 Infor 2 2 nern ee una ed ee 330 External verHealon ee a a a a a S e T N 334 14 Error messa Da dd a a ea ee AR 335 ETO hb DE rn E E A E 336 TAD OMer eror Message oa ee ee ie ee er 348 348 2 349 350 Glossary een u dd ed 356 List of Figures 1 1 Example of a diagnostic workflow pp 12 1 2 Example of part of a workflow with individual steps pp 13 1 3 Example of an active link in the table of contents pp 13 3 1 Start ne the Installation se en ne a Ders 17 3 2 Language selection for installation aaa aan u u des evtnaeedacerak devas 17 3 3 The Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Setup wizard pp 17 3 4 Target folder fOr Insfalaton a en a det etadeteneue a N amenmeuete eae 18 33 lacer directory Tor diasnostic Component ai 19 3 0 Plator Se ECHO ee i a se ee 20 3 1 Select1on OF the applieation laneuases ee 2 3 8 Delecting Theda ONOStIC MMC ACS ee ee 21 39 Nlessace Tor Bluetoothi ie 22 3 105 Selectins The GD 23 3 1 1 Seleeling The Start menu Toller sata au Dune ales 24 3 12 Displaying The copying PIOCESS semen oe a a i A a E E N AR 25 3 13 Installing the RDU A Pheann o ie 26 dh TStALne tne VC LI Sery er sm nee 20 9 15 nStalation COMPILE eisen 24 3 16 Starting the PosSsceip ae oe nn ne a EEA 28 3 17 Display or Ihe Postem dass sn nk irn 29 3 18 Installation of the PostSetup data nn 30
18. DS Ey nee MOE ek eiserne 137 6 123 KWP del ult Set ne zes na i dd a a 138 6 124 UDS default setting Selection of the default settings pp 140 6 125 UDS Uelaule setting Parame di San eiserne ni er ei Ferne 141 6 126 UDS default setting Measured value selection nira a doeaetes ware nated 142 6 12 7 Selectine Ihe defauliSelline nes ee ee a de a ESE 143 6 128 UDS detault setting CC On Sut at On ae ik 144 6 129 Results window of self diagnosis identification pp 146 Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service User Manual 6 130 Measured value Selection EWP es T T E 147 6 1 3 gt 12 KWP measured Valle Cis Play ci cians ine sur eine ee 149 6 152 RW P actuator AS 150 6 153 Buttons Tor CGO 150 6 1 534 ACIUALOr did CMOSIS status are seinen ferne 151 QW AUD ach ator SeleC HOM ee RR gona ae a Te al 152 6 156 U DS actualor parame SAOR selon 153 6 137 UDS actuator diagnosis Parametrisation problems pp 154 6 158 UDS mie sured valuesselechon ex a ie 155 OMEGA 155 62140 2U DS Ac mator Tas ner a SA 156 6 141 Example of the actuator test on several actuators pp 157 6 142 ACCESS author sa on zer a de ee a a 159 6 1435 Access authorisauon Authentication ae an iin a er todas 160 6 144 ACCESS authonsauon Suecessiul so a ini 160 6 145 ACCESS authorisation U nsuecesstuh a susanne da di ne R 160 6 146 Event memories Or oyerallsysten als 161 6 147 Selecting the method for erasing the event memory pp 162
19. Error message for incorrect sender mail address nn ie a u 292 2 293 OU 294 295 11 25 amp arport Group system View ee eine 297 1126 Group System SS VIC W rset ee a a dd a a 298 Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service User Manual 11 2 yx Group System COOP ie 299 E26 MOr SOINE 2 VIEW nee ie ee ehe nee kein 300 1 1 29 External EGG 301 12 4 Data Bifon essen eo a a O A 303 12 2 Seleetins COOL 305 1253 Query m adla nosie session 1S Cancelled wur tieren in Traun na ae huts 306 12 22 Saving Ardila sMOstic SESSION ia Kae nennen 307 12 5 Feedback alter savine a diagnostic SESSIO de da od a E ATE 307 12 6 Loading 2 Gia enOsuc Session DIE esis ae Me E O 308 12 7 Error Wile loading adie nostic Sessi O era a de cote diets ual ER 309 309 12 92 onten of the Extras Men u RR EL usa 311 12 10 Dialosue forthe search FUNCU OW a ae a a a cus puaetusenden 312 12 11 Displaying ie Sedr cies UNS 52h cee ee stad ae ee er u ei el 313 12 12 example On a Search Eu ee a a a 313 1213 Chanoins the Qiasnostie hardware As anne ee 314 12 14 Removal OF the as 315 12 15 Selecion of the desired diag enosuc hardW ate so sen ne ae tones TI ET en een 315 12 16 Connecting Thesne w diasnostie hardware aan 316 Rn 310 12 18 Diasnostic hardw re Nas been Chan Ged une ihren 317 12 19 Changina the diaenosuc hardware faled a na a Me roku ties setae tates u coated 317 318 122 1 Comiimnanon th
20. Info mode After selecting the document type Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches from the Test plan tab in Diagnostic mode to the Documents tab in Info mode Documents for the test programs describe the following issues Which documents are available depends on the test program 2 Block circuit diagram 2 File with CD contents 2 Instructions for settings 2 Fitting location 2 Function description 2 Function test instructions 2 Test equipment 2 Pin assignment 2 Fuse assignment 2 Connector view 2 Tools 2 Circuit diagram 2 Repair instructions D Note Additional documents are available on the Manuals and Circuit diagrams tabs gt Reference See also chapters Manuals tab and Circuit diagrams tab To return to the test plan switch to Diagnostic mode 189 Info mode 8 2 Actions tab A click on the Actions tab displays field actions already performed for the vehicle such as recall campaigns Documents Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Venice PR no Feldaktionen Fahrzeugdaten Fahrzeugidentnr WwWZZzzl Z3W376d491 Feldaktionen Ifd Nr Aktion Start Bezeichnung Rep Dat Kriterium Abgewickelt 1 INGO 2008 03 04 4 DIES IST EINE TESTAKTION 03 Nein 2 13C3 2006 05 16 A Zweimassenschwungrad ZMS 2006 06 16 02 Ja sls Figure 8 12 View of the Actions tab Scroll forward a page Scroll back a page You can use this button to reload content Authoris
21. JVYAIYAIG IIVYI III J IJVJIMYIMVIDGMI IY IO e JAW SYS A DED DOODODODDODWC JY JaAGONWDDBWWL I EDES C EI CH 10 2 3 3 Chinese Simplified 90600600000eees STK III ITO DE JOON SSae IIHITSITIIIE I Cj OI I EIIWEFIRITIAIJUIIJEI UN NGDDODUDWUDDOD 2z x cv BIN J W 244 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 4 Danish AQDVOWBODOOOVO STITT TITS IIIVIIINIIN 0 IIIIIIIIIIIED DLL cc anmamaD0DDDODC ITI III ITT WITT IWIWNO GIOS u DH OVONWOOIE I JE OO OVW ON wt ee EIIIIIOOOIOOOODY 080 IIIIIIII IT _ Jo 10 2 3 5 English GB JVYAIYIPG IIVYV IIS I III IEI UN DOnODWODDDO 20000000S DDN UL C 245 Virtual keyboard manual JOHSHHEHLIIITI aogwennDauDonwo ANSDODOUWUDWD YY AltGr Us EO IODOOOOOOODODD IIIIIIII III CoCo JIIIIIIIIIIIITIC EO R ZOOO ILL en 10 2 3 6 English USA DVJE LJD D OQGCONOCCOCOOMES DOnOWUDWDDWL IIHITSDTIITE _ SE cc 246 Seo Virtual keyboard manual JVA 2 IWERALL JS WCTT OO 3585 WEI ACO cc 10 2 3 7 Farsi IOIIHIIDIIIIITT II LL OOOUDDOSGO amp IIHITITIHTIIIE I Cj IO OI J a DVVO LL _ 888 80 0080 0 EB 10 2 3 8 Finnish Sj 2 3 4 se eo WI III R 00000000000 IJJI AAE I Ater 247 Virtual keyboard manual HOIHHIILAIHAITI JIVE III ITEMS WISI TOCIWOOWO CH CI Cs Sool Os 9 VWIODVOVO DUVVI 0000
22. Ne SLS 233 10 1 Tistallation parane tei anna euer lea es E eee enge 240 10 25 Installer return Wales Dr oe eo ea 240 19 35 TME ICY Sa ee ee ee re 241 LOA C hane mne Characleis ass re ee ee ie sl 242 10 5 Tea WAGES SUP OMS re a E 243 11 1 Table Or error DS 3 2350 host el E E AR as tne a cor E EEN ANC bec 336 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Notes on the manual This manual describes how to use the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service program of the Volk swagen Group The program is used in the field of workshop diagnos s It allows vehicle control units to be lden tified and event memory entries to be read It also supports vehicle repairs using guided fault finding Functions such as test instrument support flashing control units and vehicle self diagnosis extend the range of applications All important information and services of the Volkswagen group are available to you for your work via network connection to the Group systems Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is intended for all brands of the Volkswagen group To illustrate the significant workflows such as diagnosis and flashing the corresponding chapters include a graph ical view showing which part of the process is just being described what the previous step was and what is to do next Testplan and special functions _ Executing Executing Ending start modules Haste j GFF Executing traversion Ending Diagnosis Calculat
23. ODS8034E There is no information available for internally Please contact Support marked vehicles Diagnostic start up will be cancelled ODS9001E Contents of software pool and data pool are Please contact Support faulty ODS9002E An error occurred during download from soft Please contact Support ware pool and data pool ODS9003E An error occurred during upload to software Please contact Support pool and data pool ODS9004E Cannot connect to MirrorServer2 Please contact Support ODS9005E There is not enough free memory for the up Please contact Support date KB required but only KB available ODS9006E Administration rights are required for the up Please contact Support date Please log in as an administrator and then perform the update ODS9007E The update failed or was cancelled Please contact Support ODS9101E Local computer name could not be determined Please contact Support ODS9102E The configured mail server is not known Please contact the mail server administrator or your provider ODS9103E No information configured for mail server Please check the information or contact Support 346 Error messages ODS9104E Transmission of the existing e mail s failed Check that there is a network connection or con tact Support The original text of the error message is ODS9105E Error while creating e mail Please contact the mail server administrator or your pro
24. Status area The status area shows the current progress and status The diagnostic entrance was ended Figure 5 12 Status area example test plan calculation 45 Test plan is being calculated 0 Application start user interface For example the progress of the calculation of the test plan during diagnostic start up can be monitored The buttons for adjusting the size of the client area and for exiting Offboard Diagnostic Information System are alie to the right of the status line The Hide button is used to hide the Modes and standard functions area The Show button can be used to show this area again To hide the Information area and the Modes and standard functions area click on the Full screen button To show the Information area and the Modes and standard functions area again click on this button eo m To exit the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service program click on this button A confir mation prompt will then ask you if you really want to exit the program If you confirm this with Yes Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is closed If guided fault finding is active it needs to be exited first Otherwise you will be asked whether a support request is to be sent at the end of the diagnostic session gt Reference See also Ending diagnosis 46 Application start user interface chapter 5 1 Operation Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service can be operated us
25. Test drive A Test drive mode is integrated in Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Activate this mobility mode if a test drive is being carried out with the vehicle and there is thus no network connection available to the tester 2 Note Mobile operation can only be started and ended when there is a network connection The Test drive button has two situation dependent functions and changes its appearance accordingly If the application is not in test drive mode it is started using this button If the application is In test drive mode it is exited using this button A Test dri Click on this button to start test drive mode The following message appears ey Test drive mode Test drive mode is not currenth activated You can activate test drive mode Cancel Figure 12 20 Activating test drive mode Deactivate Test drive mode To copy all the required data to the test device click on this button Cancel Activation of test drive mode is cancelled After copying has taken place a message appears stating that test drive mode is now activated Test drive mode e Test drive mode has been successfully activated Figure 12 21 Confirmation that test drive mode is active 318 Additional program functions OK Click on this button to confirm the message cs This symbol is now displayed in the information area showing that test drive mode is now activated The data created during mobile
26. The view consists of a table with three columns Address The diagnostic address of the control unit System The name of the control unit Event The number of events read On switching to the view the table is automatically updated i e an attempt is made to read the events that occurred in each control unit installed If the control unit s event memory is empty 0 is entered in green text in the same column For control units with entries in the event memory the number of events is displayed in red in the Event column In addition a is 161 Diagnostic mode displayed in front of the diagnostic address If the user clicks on it the events that occurred are listed in detail Additional information on an event can be displayed by clicking on the in front of the event If it was not possible to read the event memory of a control unit the Event column for this control unit remains empty The user has two ways of updating the table by clicking on the now button or by ticking the in cycles option In the first case the table is updated exactly once To stop the update click on the Cancel button If the user selects update in cycles the table is updated continuously according to the interval displayed in the text box under the option The value must be entered in seconds By default an interval of 30 seconds is used If no value is entered the value last entered is used If the interval s shorter than the time required for the u
27. Uber eine Funkyerbinaung er zum Fahrzeug ist nicht zulassig Stellen Sie vor dem Fortfahren unbedingt sicher dass der Anschluss des Fahrzeuges Uber eine kabelgebundene Verbindung erfolgt Fortsetzen Abbrechen Cy Reference For a detailed description of how to change the diagnostic hardware see VCI 168 Flash mode If a permitted diagnostic connection has been selected and the vehicle is connected flash start up can begin Importer 123 Vehicle identification no WVWZZ7 1 KZ6VV061 146 Dealer 67890 Engine Order Welcome to flashing Objective quick execution offlashing actions After you have connected the vehicle the vehicle will undergo a shortened identification process without event memory evaluation Afterwards you will only have access to the flashing functions from guided fault finding Data lt Extras Help lt Info g Connected to the vehicle Ignition switched on 2 El le Figure 7 3 Start window for flash start up gt Start flash session Click on Start flashing to start flash start up 169 Flash mode 7 2 Vehicle identification The vehicle is identified after starting flash start up Flashing Identificaling Starting a flash session control units Figure 7 4 Identify vehicle section Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service attempts an automatic vehicle analysis first Importer 123 Vehicle ide
28. VWlocalcpn gateway testwob vw vwg services http Wlocalcpn cpn vwg SPKSLP http V Wlocalcpn cpn vwg SPKRETALL 295 Administration mode To be able to display data from ElsaPro in Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service the URLs for e Vehicle history e Workshop manuals e Technical product information e Circuit diagrams e Field actions need to be entered under Group system details ElsaPro The data required to log on to the Group systems e Brand 1 character e Country 3 characters e Dealer ID 5 characters is taken from the licence and only displayed here reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 2 Note If these entries are not correct either the ElsaPro data cannot be accessed or the required login to the Group systems will fail 296 Administration mode 2 Connections Group system Carport The address for connecting to the carport Group system is configured in this area Offboard Diagnostic Infor mation System Service specifies an address Test instruments Test instruments Action Connections Support General Storage locations Brand settings Details on Group system Carport Group system GFF Group system ElsaPro URL for vehicle data h
29. Voltage measurement via the DSO1 measur ing socket 2 To activate the Voltage DSO1 measuring function use the button of the same name ODIS Service 0 8 15 20000101 Importer 008 Vehicle identification no WVWDU73C47P014862 Dealer 00800 Engine AHA A Fa o Order Mutimeter Oscilloscope Modes SY Test instruments yp Diagnosis E Info xe Admin Data Extras Help Info Figure 9 10 Client area for activated DSO1 voltage measurement 2 The following test parameters can be set e Coupling DC voltage or AC voltage e DC voltage measuring range 0 4V1 1 6V1 4V1 16V I 40V 1 160V 400V e AC voltage measuring range 0 0 4V 0 1 6V 10 4V 10 16V 0 40V 0 160V 10 400V e Automatic or manual measuring range selection e Functions freeze frame minimum maximum calibration 9 2 7 Current measurement with the clamp on ammeter 2 To activate the Current clamp on ammeter measuring function use the button of the same name 209 Test Instruments mode EEE Pooler Multimeter Oscilloscope Figure 9 11 Client area for activated Current clamp on ammeter current measurement The following four clamp on ammeter types are supported 50A SZ 100A SZ 500A SZ 1800A SZ 2 The following test parameters can be set e Coupling direct current or alternating current e Direct current measuring range 5A 1 10A 50A I 100A
30. and Self diagnosis rind This button is enabled if a search term is entered and at least one object type has been selected After activating it the results are displayed under Search results 312 Additional program functions Jas Search terms air Object types Test Special function Guided funct MI Diagnostic object Document Search results Object ype _ Source Test Charge Air Pressure Gauge G30 Csuided funct Alroaqs belt tensioners deactvating activating rte ol mel rosa 1d Figure 12 11 Displaying the search results The results are sorted by object type and source Go to To go to the corresponding result or add the object type that has been found to the test plan select the corresponding entry Then this button is enabled Click on the Go to button to open the marked objects A document is displayed in the document view A guided function is started during the process A test program is attached to the test plan With a diagnostic object an existing test is attached to the test plan A special function is added to the special functions The following figure shows a search result Status Tests sored by their potential success 3 Connection to radio DID_19 1304 4 Radio No signalfcommunication Intermittent fo TEL_77 1304 4 Radio No signal communication Intermittent 3 Connection to control mo
31. high frequency interference can be filtered out by clicking on the Filter button The corresponding button is also shown in function block 2 in the area of the test parameters 2 The following test parameters can be set e Measuring range automatic or manual measuring range selection e Functions freeze frame minimum maximum Onote A connected pressure sensor is automatically identified and the measuring range is adjusted accordingly Qn The unit of measurement for the pressure measurement can be set to bar or Ib in in Admin mode 211 Test Instruments mode 9 2 9 Temperature measurement via T P device socket 2 To activate the Temperature T P measuring function depending on the device also Temperature T P 2 use the button of the same name Multimeter Oscilloscope Figure 9 13 Client area for activated Temperature T P temperature measurement 2 The following test parameters can be set e Measuring range 20 200 C e Functions freeze frame minimum maximum Onote The connected temperature sensor for measurements in liquid or air is automatically detected The unit of mea surement for the temperature measurement can be set to C or F in Admin mode 9 3 The Oscilloscope client area The Oscilloscope tab on the tab bar is used to activate the corresponding client area Use the Oscilloscope function to make user defined settings for the measuring leads connected via the device sockets
32. method ODS5S5S06E Error during control unit communication job control unit ECF error text ODS5507F Communication description file could not be Please contact Support found ODSS5508F Error while reading communication description Please contact Support file ODS5S509F Contents of communication description file in Please contact Support valid Please contact Support ODSS5510E Communication job for control unit could not be found in description file Please contact Support ODS5511E Method described incorrectly in description Please contact Support ODS5512E Error while converting parameters for class Please contact Support ODS5513E Communication job for connection could Please contact Support not be generated ODSS5514E lIncorrect job description for in description Please contact Support file ODSS515E Error while acquiring results of control unit Please contact Support communication ODSS5519E lInternal error in test program method for Please contact Support job not found ODSS5551E Connection name for control unit could not be Please contact Support found ODS5552E Communication job could not be created Please contact Support ODS5553E Requirement parameters for communication Please contact Support job could not be determined ODS5554E Unable to determine a valid value for require Pl
33. please contact Support Z 336 Error messages ODSO0502E This software installation is incomplete Please check if there is an update for the soft ware or data Flash mode cannot be executed with the exist ing software If the error still applies please contact Support ODSOS03E Flash mode does not support the current Please check if there are updates for the software brand at the moment Flash mode cannot be executed for this brand If the error still applies please contact Support ODSOS04E There are inconsistencies within the diagnostic Please check if there is an update for the soft data for the current brand ware or data Flash mode cannot be executed for this brand If the error still applies please contact Support ODSOSO05E There are ambiguities within the diagnostic data Please check if there is an update for the soft for the current brand ware or data Flash mode cannot be executed for this brand If the error still applies please contact Support ODSI001E Not available Timeout after seconds Please contact Support Please restart the program ODS1002E The session has expired for account If the error still applies please immediately con tact Support Incorrect connection data and server data has been entered in the Administration area ODS1003E Unable to connect to VehicleBaseServiceV 15 Please contact Support ODS100
34. tem could not be instantiated version Please contact Support 338 Missing or faulty vehicle project The function is not intended for the control unit The print job has been cancelled by the user Error messages ODS2511F The MCD system could not be instantiated This may be for several reasons 1 Another application using the MCD server is active End these applications and restart the ap plication 2 Another application using the MCD server cannot be closed Restart the computer and try again Please contact Support ODS2512F The system is being shut down now All pending Please check if Offboard Diagnostic Informa activities will be cancelled tion System Service is working again correct ly after the start If that is not the case contact Support ODS2513E The diagnostic interface of the MCD system Check the configuration of your diagnostic hard could not be configured correctly ware in the PDU Api and adjust it if necessary ODS2514E Error while accessing the logical link monitor of Please contact Support the MCD system ODS3001E File could not be found could not be found Check that the Check that the path is correct or contact Support Check that the path is correct or contact Support correct or contact Support Saa No st E permission for account for file You do not have the necessary access rights Please contact Support ODS3003E No write permission for account
35. that indicate the status of the network connection and of test drive mode Fa Network connection is available Test drive mode can be activated X Network connection is interrupted Test drive mode cannot be activated A network connection must be established first 3 me Ks Test drive mode is activated Test drive mode is activated but the network connection is interrupted 2 Note If the directory in which the global configuration is saved to the server is renamed or deleted in test drive mode a corresponding message does NOT appear when ending test drive mode Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service continues to use the local copy of the configuration The individual responsible for the network ensures that Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is correctly configured after any changes to the workshop infrastructure have been made 320 Additional program functions 12 3 Help The Help menu includes these two functional areas that provide the user with support in the event of problems e Online help e Support gt Help Online help Support Figure 12 25 Help menu 321 12 3 1 Online help Online help Additional program functions After clicking on this button the online help appears in a separate window in which the help texts are displayed in the context of the application The online help can be accessed at all times during operation of Offboard Diagnostic
36. the selection A test program or document can also be selected by double clicking on it Additional components or documents can now be added Manually added tests are at the end of the test plan You can use the Remove button on the Test plan tab to remove these test programs and documents from the test plan A To also search for a test using the search function click on the Search symbol Reference See also chapter Search function Close The window is closed 108 Diagnostic mode To start the test program for manually added components and documents click on the Perform test button Note Tests and documents that have been added manually to the test plan are displayed in light blue 2 Note Components that have been added manually to the test plan and have not yet been tested using the Perform test button will NOT be accepted if the test plan is calculated again 6 5 Ending diagnosis In the End diagnosis section a diagnostic session is completed by erasing the event memory executing end modules and the option of giving feedback Testplan and special functions Diagnostic Start up Staring Executing Executing diagnosis start modules fasts Executing the Executing 1 GMD iraversion tesis Login to Group Systems Selecting an Adjusting the order test pan DISS TFI identificating control units Starting GFF Figure 6 81 End diagno
37. this key is highlighted This marking is removed again the next time a normal key is pressed The currently active characters are displayed on the keys and pressing a special key adapts the layout accordingly The different display options are shown in Table 10 4 Changing characters using the lt key as an example Normal After pressing SHIFT After pressing ALTGR Table 10 4 Changing characters 10 2 1 3 Settings dialogue The settings dialogue can be used to define the transparency of the virtual keyboard The possible values are in the range between 0 no transparency and 90 almost complete transparency The keyboard s transparency changes while the scroll bar is moved Press the OK button to apply the change Press the Reset key to restore the setting that was active on opening the window I ME virtual keyboard properties Main About transparency Figure 10 4 Settings dialogue 10 2 2 Languages The keyboard layout changes depending on the input language that is currently active If a language is not sup ported the US American keyboard is displayed The following languages are supported 242 Virtual keyboard manual mm nn Table 10 5 Languages supported 10 2 3 Keyboard layouts 10 2 3 1 German SWEJ LE WII YY gt IIIIITFII II S9 A Cannio Bild Brit DjEjisjHjujkjujioaLD 999 SB MIL 2 aS t 010109 243 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 2 Bulgarian
38. 138 Deleting event memory entries 136 163 Design 269 Diagnosis 42 Diagnostic connection legal 168 Diagnostic interface 21 Diagnostic object 92 Diagnostic protocol 286 Diagnostic protocol send external 304 Diagnostic session storage location 283 Display format 82 DISS complaints 86 Documents 181 188 DVD 16 E E mail size restriction 291 End diagnosis 52 End modules 111 Engine code 193 Error classification 326 Error messages 335 Event code 135 Event memories for overall system 161 Event memory 79 134 Event memory entry 79 Event text 135 Executing the test program 98 External verification 301 334 Extras menu 44 F Feedback 288 325 Filter setting 218 Firewall 31 291 348 Flash start up 168 Flashing 167 Frequency counter 82 Full screen 46 Function description 104 G Gateway 68 Gateway installation list 68 Gearbox code 193 GFF 83 GFF sequence 280 Global configuration 278 Guided fault finding 83 351 Index Guided function 78 H Hardware part number 81 Hardware version number 81 Help menu 45 Hotfix 310 Identification 146 Identify control units 76 Ignition 41 Importer 41 Importer number 41 Info 42 Info menu 45 Information area 40 Installation 16 Installation list 68 165 Installation status 68 Interface 40 K KWP 122 127 138 147 150 150 KWP 1281 159 KWP 2000 159 L Language 270 Licence
39. 21 Client area of the target curves function Onote Target curves are for supporting the diagnostic technician in both guided fault finding and stand alone test in struments with reference curves The currently measured signal yellow and green signal curve can be compared to the reference signal blue and red signal curve If the characteristics of the measured signal match the charac teristics of the reference signal it can be assumed that the tested vehicle component is OK A distinction is generally made between two different modes when using the target curves function e User mode Only existing target curves can be displayed Only the Display button is available e Expert mode n addition to displaying target curves authenticated individuals can also record save and edit target curves and implement them in function tests Onote To activate the full target curve functionality password authentication in Admin mode is required gt Reference See also Admin mode chapter 231 Test Instruments mode 2 Note If the Target curve function is active the channels the trigger and the measuring mode cannot be parametrised 2 Recording target curves To be able to record target curves at least one channel must be parametrised first Simultaneous recording of two channels is also possible To start recording the measuring signal as a target curve click on the Record button If the measurement is only ru
40. 278 Limit values 219 Load session 306 M Mail server 291 Manufacturer 59 Maximum no 73 82 Measured value block 147 Measured values 147 Mileage 82 Mirror server 300 Model 59 Model year 59 Modes 42 Modes menu 42 Mouse 47 Multimeter client area AC coupling 202 Calibration 199 Clamp on ammeter 209 DC coupling 202 Diagnostic measured values 199 DSO measuring lead 209 Freeze frame 198 Function blocks 200 Measuring range 202 Minimum maximum 199 352 Index Pressure measurement 211 Single and parallel measurements 203 Temperature measurement 212 Test parameters 201 URDI measuring lead 203 N Network 41 Notes 333 O Online help 321 Operation 47 Order 41 Order number 41 Oscilloscope client area Bandwidth limit 230 Channel parametrisation 216 Freeze frame 234 Long term measurement in draw mode 222 Measuring mode 219 Target curves 230 Time base and image position 215 Trigger parametrisation 226 Oscilloscope coupling 218 Oscilloscope measuring range 218 Outgoing mail server 290 Outgoing mail server mail setting 290 Overall test 96 P Part number 140 PassThru 22 314 Performing the test 98 Platform 19 PostSetup 27 PR number 195 Print 304 Print diagnostic protocol 304 Priority 327 Product variant 278 Production date 193 Program update 34 Provider 291 Proxy server 291 R Radio head 23 Radio head documentation 22
41. 6 148 Waring before erasing the event Memory ai 162 6 149 Tanpo Mode an u ea ed dl klinik 163 6 150 Success message after changing transport mode pp 163 Gaul Dd Trans pr de 164 6 192 Instal lionrlist aaa ee EN E A E E E 165 6 153 View in the event of faulty communication with a control unit pp 166 dle WOPKMOW 10 1 3sh OG zes Eiern 167 72 Start HASHING Section nasse een reisen a 168 Tat wn Ow HOr Fas Lan De ea a E NE 169 TA UCT VENIC le SCC ION ae ol dle da ll dl i a 170 hd VebIcle analysis ae 170 7 0 Manual vehicle dent lleatl On oe os test arte eiserne 171 ie 172 7 0 LOSM 10 GIOUD GYSIEMS SeCHON rn i a dl a ed uses 172 OO 173 7 10 Select order section ccs zea elo Odo Uo oe A a Re A 174 174 7 12 Identity Control Unis seio sie een eat ie 176 7 13 Contool EGG 176 7 14 Execute Tashi proclaims Sec te ee ein uf 177 7 19 Avallable Hash DLO CTAINS dni tntaaeuaandins a a serieriee 177 TIO End Taine see on ei da er ld dn de dd dd ES 178 2 17 ACIS a 1lash SESSIONS ep es near a 179 7 18 Endina a Flash SESSION teers ta cst ne dn a TR AR TR Le TE 179 DT 180 2 181 8 3 Seleceine 3 documen to pe CIS Play ed Zus ee mens 182 84 VIEWHOR ax COCUINCNE ser a er ne ee el ee 183 89 Examples document Ce reelle Denise 184 8 0 Example L document Views ln rennen dd a id 185 8 7 Example 2 document CC eek 185 8 8 Bxample 2Uocwniene Te 180 8 9 Document with NOUS POE ee a i 186 SO Open DOL SPO ola
42. 6 148 Warning before erasing the event memory Yes The event memories of all control units that support this function will be erased No Erasure will not be performed After completing the erasure any errors that occurred are displayed in a dialogue If the method was successful no other messages are displayed To erase the event memories of the control units one after the other select Individual from the list The confir mation prompt above appears here as well which needs to be confirmed by the user with OK Then the event 162 Diagnostic mode memories of the control units are erased one after the other After each erasure the event memory of the control unit is re read and the result is displayed in a table 2 Note After erasing an event memory it is re read immediately and its content is displayed If the event memory is not empty and still includes all or some events displayed before the erasure the control unit did not accept the command for erasing or the corresponding event was immediately re entered since the cause of the error has not been eliminated yet Event memory entries that have been deleted CANNOT be restored 6 6 3 2 Transport mode The following dialogue appears we Switch transport mode on or off Status of switching transport mode on or off Transport mode has not yet been switched on or off Switch off transport mode Cancel Figure 6 149 Transport mode Exe
43. 95 Selection window for vehicle self diagnosis bd a i a a oa AEE 119 6 96 Selr diasnos s Example of Atab 1 mE ee 120 6 97 MN amino adaplallon es norsu ppor d se eo et oa a a Er 121 G95 da Pta GOK WV sn ee ed a I EN 122 699 Adaptation m oTmal on Alea mn i ekente 123 6 100 Error message in the event of an invalid adaptation value ppp 123 6 101 Adaptalion UD Sasse rss tenet eerie cote tas wm a Fr a ee ne re Tue da a 124 6 102 Warmins omnes me te parameter Ist aan 125 6 103 Confirmation prompt before performing the adaptation pp 125 6 104 Error message in the event of an invalid adaptation value pp 126 GOD MOM CODES eee ones sitscse ein tones en ee re 127 6 106 EonHrmat on prompt DETO COCING ana i a EE 127 6 107 SUCCESS message alter COMING nie ten a a a a aA 128 6 108 Request 10 Teset the TOMIMON a ee ihnen 128 6 10 NEW and Old Ira ei ec Dre ae Teig 128 6 110 Error message durins coding due to missing dala ac ep i a a a 128 129 6 112 User put tor bins ode ne 130 6 113 Confirmation prompt before Dinary Coding au usa a a ua ae 131 6 114 Note on missing checksum during binary coding pp 131 6 115 Note on incorrect checksum during binary coding pp 132 MLLO SUCCESS messa ear CINE Ruin a N 132 6 117 Request TosTesetthesienhilion ser een tt eo ew bet ed totes 132 LIS Warning when switchine to plan ext 20de a 133 ODS 133 6 120 EWF even niemals 135 6 121 Somme the event ie 130 62122
44. Information System Ser vice Example If you have currently opened the Test plan tab after performing guided fault finding and then click on the help symbol the online help will open with the corresponding Guided fault finding chapter Control units Tests in current test plan Status Tests sorted by th is Help ODIS Service Product F Ignition key 5 Drivetrain data a 7 Driver s Windo e Thermal protect KD96 3C__ 1 0805 11_Schludl Perform test Select own test Remove Figure 12 26 Context related online help Process Special functions Orders Diss Test plan Using GFF ES Chapter 6 Diagnostic mode Next Using GFF The focus of the Using GFF section ls on the execution of tests of Guided Fault Finding GFF Testplan and special functions Diagnostic start up Starting Executing diagnosis start modules Executing the Executing GMD traversion tests Login to Group Systems Calculating the test plan Adjusting the test plan DISS TPI Selacting an order Identificating control units A more exact description of the online help window follows 322 Additional program functions Help ODIS Service Product Search 9 Search area All topics Table of contents O Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service User Manual amp Offboard Diagnostic Using GFF A Int
45. Offboard Diagnostic Infor mation System For start up you only need to connect the respective box to the diagnostic tester via USB port and install the corresponding software package from the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service installation folder sub directory drivers Extras a Searching wa af Test drive Figure 12 13 Changing the diagnostic hardware 314 Additional program functions In the Extras menu of the standard functions the dialogue for changing the diagnostic hardware is selected by clicking on VCI The change is made in several steps Sc hange diagnostic hardware 1 Remove the diagnostic hardware WAS5054 currently connected to the vehicle Confirm execution Act Diagnostic hardware INFRAROT ULTRASCHALL VAS5054 Cancel Figure 12 14 Removal of the diagnostic hardware 1 Remove the currently connected diagnostic hardware and confirm this in the dialogue box Cancel The diagnostic hardware change is cancelled SC hange diagnostic hardware 2 Selectthe desired diagnostic hardware from the following list Act Diagnostic hardware INFRAROT ULTRASCHALL VAS5054 Cancel Figure 12 15 Selection of the desired diagnostic hardware 315 Additional program functions 2 Selection of the desired diagnostic hardware in the dialogue box Cancel The diagnostic hardware change is cancelled 054 currently connect
46. Re read event memory 77 Read enter VIN 57 Readiness code 112 Reading plan 69 Repair history 191 S SAE code 135 353 Index Save diagnostic protocol 304 Save session 306 Search 311 Select certificate 23 Select diagnostic interface 21 Select engine 59 Select platform 19 Select variant 77 Selective actuator diagnosis 150 Self diagnosis 117 Self diagnosis context menu button 75 Send diagnostic protocol 304 Sequential actuator diagnosis 150 Session 283 setup exe 16 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 291 Software part number 81 Software version 146 Software version number 81 Sort preference 82 Special functions 95 sporadic static 82 Standard functions 43 Standard order 65 Start diagnosis 52 Status 82 Status line 45 Support contact data 288 Support request 325 System designation 81 System environment 276 System identification 146 System name 81 System requirements 15 T Tab bar 41 Table of contents 13 Target directory for the diagnostic components 18 Target installation 68 Test abortion 99 Test instruments Administration 237 Diagnostic measured values 235 General 196 Multimeter client area 197 Oscilloscope client area 212 Test plan 96 98 Test program 98 Touchscreen 47 Transport mode 163 Trigger amplitude 229 Trigger channel 228 Trigger coupling 228 Trigger edge 229 Trigger threshold 227 354 Index U UDS 124
47. Select127 C0mponenls ern si asian 108 109 6 0 SE diasnosis se na anne 115 8 6 1 Sell d1a5n08s1s 1m Senetal u tee ee ee in ea 115 6 62 Eonl1 l unit specific fUNCHONS ei ee 121 GEL LADA ai ee ee 121 6 6 2 1 1 Control units with KWP protocol pp 122 6 6 2 1 2 Control units with UDS protocol pp 124 OO 126 6 6 2 2 1 Coding on KWP control units pp 12 1 6 0 2 2 2 Coding on UDS Control Uns ah a Ka 129 6 62 3 Event memory en ers erneuern ne 134 6 0 24 Delaulesetins era ee 138 6 6 2 4 1 Default setting on KWP control units pp 138 6 6 2 4 2 Default setting on UDS control units pp 140 002S lden CAO rss a en ent 146 6 6 2 0 Measired VALUES me een 147 6 6 2 6 1 Measured values with KWP control units pp 147 OA 150 6 6 2 7 1 Actuator diagnosis on KWP control units pp 150 6 6 2 7 2 Actuator diagnosis on UDS control units pp 152 602 S ACCESS Authorisallon aan ee AA 159 6 6 2 8 1 Control units with KWP 1281 protocol pp 159 6 6 2 8 2 Control units with KWP 2000 or UDS protocol pp 159 6 63 Vehiclesspecitie 161 6 6 3 1 Event memories for overall system pp 161 Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service User Manual 06 053 2 Eransport mode ee E 163 6 9 3232 I0stallaton Est ser ae et eek ie 165 Tt co A A E AE 167 JS 108 7 2 NCIC LE dOnt Neal a ee es ee AE A 170 OO 172 SIECO 174 TD Tdontilyimne CONTO L UNS area nes i 176 SI LS EGG 177 dd Ends a Tce ION a einen hauen ee
48. System Service has been started on this computer Figure 14 1 Description of the error messages OeError ID The ID assigned to the error Or opology name The name of the application range where the area occurs error description The description of the malfunction OK Closes the error message Use the error ID to look for the specific error message in the Error D table The column on the right Notes describes how to further proceed 2 Note The most frequently encountered error messages occur as a result of connection failures to the vehicle and the network In this case it is recommended to check the connections and restart the system 335 Error messages 14 1 Error IDs No ID No vehicle data found This message may be displayed on the following tabs Orders Vehicles and PR numbers Please check the network connection and inform Support This page cannot be displayed The information area of the user interface shows the current network status If the network sta tus is offline the following tabs cannot be dis played TPI Action History Circuit diagrams and Manuals Please check the network connection and inform Support No ID No network connection available This error message is displayed in the follow ing situation a tab is activated while the network connection is active in the meantime the net work connection is interrupted Connect to the network again or contact
49. This button is only active if there is more than one message Previous message Next message 99 Diagnostic mode The Message and instruction window is in the middle of the Process view 1 Overview of the tests z Body Repair Group 01 27 50 to 97 Body Collision Repair Repair Group O1 50 to 7 Heating ventilation air conditioning system Repair Group A Electrical System Repair Group 01 275 90 to oF 9 J1 systems capable of self diagnosis Diagnostic interface for databus Steering wheel electronics Electrical components steering wheel electronics Ignition Starter Switch D Turn signal switch E2 m Attach to test plan Figure 6 71 Message and instruction window during the test The message w ndow for the test sequence contains information and instructions for the individual test steps The individual steps executed so far are listed on the left of the active test program 100 Diagnostic mode Figure 6 72 Step sequence during the test The current test step is displayed within a blue border To view previously processed messages and instructions for fault finding use the navigation buttons described above or click on the individual test steps to the left of the fault finding instructions e g Test preparation steps Select model End modules Event memory evaluation A test program can provide alternative test steps for selection 101 Diagnostic mode Process
50. To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 280 Administration mode 2 General keyboard settings The use of the virtual keyboard can be deactivated or activated Allgemein Speicherorte Support Verbindungen Verifikation Marken Design Details zu Tastatur Einstellungen Virtuelle Tastatur Sprache Update Virtuelle Tastatur verwenden U Systemprotokollierung System Umgebung Lizenz Informationen Globale Konfiguration GFS Ablauf Tastatur Einstellungen i Zur cksetzen Figure 11 13 Details view for the virtual keyboard Use virtual keyboard If this setting is activated the virtual keyboard is activated Otherwise the use of the virtual keyboard is deactivated If the use of the virtual keyboard s activated it appears automatically if entries are required using the keyboard in test programs of guided fault finding Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 281 Administration mode 11 3 Storage locations area 2 Storage locations database The storage location of the diagn
51. a in front of the group designator and the column on the right does not have any values Click on to open the group and display its measured values Click on in front of the group designator to close the group again The status of the currently selected actuator test is displayed above the two tree structures in the Actuator diagnosis Status field Some possible status messages may be active not active ended To start actuator diagnosis the actuators to be checked need to be selected first You can select one or more actuators by clicking on them gt Starts the selective actuator test fa Stops the actuator test Stops all active actuator tests hi Switches to the next actuator a Switches to the previous view All actuator tests are stopped when this is done That also applies if the tab is closed If the user then returns to the Perform actuator diagnosis view the actuator tests are not automatically continued but need to be re started manually D Note Measured values of selected actuators Hame Value DE00281 Fuel gauge On VOL infinite time D DE00280 _ Speedometer On YO _ infinite time DE00279 _ Rey counter On VO infinite time Figure 6 141 Example of the actuator test on several actuators The gt and fa buttons always only apply to the currently selected actuator test For example if you select the actuators to before starting these tests are started by clicking on gt
52. a frequency limit e LF low pass filter Filters out everything above a frequency limit gt Reference See also chapter Bandwidth limit 2 Show limit values To activate the indication of the limit values click on the Min Max button in the operating area The current minimum and maximum measured values after activation of the function are output numerically in the centre at the bottom part of the display area in the colour of the respective channel If the function is deactivated the limit values measured so far are discarded Owote The Min Max function is activated or deactivated simultaneously for a parallel measurement for both channels 2 Moving the signal curve The signal curves can be moved vertically using the scroll bar on the right next to the display area The trigger point coloured arrow MM according to the channel colour can be moved along with the curve The signal curves for channel A and channel B can be moved independently of each other The offset to the base line is shown below the scroll bar 2 Note If the minimum timebase of 1 25 us div has been set only one channel can be activated The button for the second channel 1s hidden 9 3 3 Setting the measuring mode If you click on the Measuring mode button a parametrisation dialogue will appear in the operating area to setthe mode for entering measured values The selected mode always applies to channel A and channel B The sel
53. also available offline without login to the Group systems A manual complaint is created using the coding wizard Click on the Coding button of a marked blank complaint line to open the Coding wizard dialogue box Codier ungsassistent Hauptgruppe Karosserie Karosserie An und Einbauten Information Navigation Kommunikation Unterhaltung Allg Randbedingungen Y Abbrechen Figure 6 56 Coding wizard dialogue box Each time after entering a manual code in the complaints table Offboard Diagnostic Information System Ser vice creates a new row for a manual complaint Reference How to use the coding wizard is described in more detail in the Coding wizard chapter Functions for displaying TPI 88 Diagnostic mode At the bottom of the complaint list there are function buttons that can be used to open the overall view of a customer code for a marked complaint to extend the test plan select suitable TPI lists from the DISS system or select individual TPI linked to the complaint on the TPI tab These function buttons are only enabled for existing DISS complaints Orders DISS Test plan DISS BA ID Customer live statement Customer code TPI from DISS Control units Process Special functions Main group Engine Electrical power electric system data transfer Air conditioning Figure 6 57 Function buttons on the DISS tab Code
54. and to use these instruments Measuring functions can be set measurements can be made and test results can be displayed saved and compared using the digital storage oscilloscope 212 Test Instruments mode 2 If the Oscilloscope function is active the following client area is visible Multimeter Oscillascape Figure 9 14 Structure of the Oscilloscope client area 2 The Oscilloscope client area consists of three areas Obispiay area Signal curves are displayed in a two dimensional system of coordinates here The horizontal axis x axis is the time axis and the vertical axis y axis is the amplitude axis Up to four signal curves can be displayed at the same time To facilitate the assignment of the test parameters in the corners of the display area the captions of the buttons and the signal curves are displayed in different colours e Yellow Channel A e Green Channel B e Blue Target curve channel A e Red Target curve channel B 213 Test Instruments mode 10msIDiv BWL Figure 9 15 Oscilloscope display area OD operating area In the operating area various measuring functions can be parametrised using the buttons The buttons shown depend on the function active in the function area Cy Reference See also chapter Image position and time base pruneion area The corresponding buttons in the function area can be used to select relevant service functions for each measure ment or the
55. are listed in the guided fault finding sorted from top to bottom by their potential SUCCESS There are several ways of creating and updating a test plan More details on creating the test plan are available in these chapters 2 Creating a test plan during diagnostic start up Reference See chapter Diagnostic start up 2 Creating a test plan by selecting the variant I Reference See chapter Diagnostic start up variant button 2 Updating a test plan by re reading the event memory Reference See chapter Diagnostic start up event memory 2 Test plan update via DISS TPI gt Reference See chapter Guided fault finding DISS TPI 6 3 2 DISS TPI This section describes how to control the creation of the test plan with the creation and integration of complaints Testplan and special functions Executing traversuon bests Executing start modules Figure 6 53 DISS TPI section 86 Diagnostic mode After compiling the test plan in the background Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service automatically switches to the DISS tab Ablauf Sonderfunktionen 7 Diss Tr Pr fplan Auftr ge Steuerger te DISS BA ID Kundenliveaussage Kundencodierung TPI aus DISS manuell Figure 6 54 DISS tab view after diagnostic start up On the one hand all DISS complaints are listed for the order selected in ElsaPro On the other hand manual compla
56. be performed on KWP or UDS control units configuration and operation will deviate The selection of the subsystem to be coded 1 e of the control unit subordinate to the current control unit is the same in both cases 1 Whether subsystems are available is checked 2 The system names of all available subsystems are displayed in a selection list There is normally no default entry instead the text Please select subsystem is displayed in the list 3 The user selects a subsystem or the control unit 4 The current code of the control unit is read automatically If the control unit does not have any subsystems steps 2 and 3 are omitted Then on opening the Coding tab the control unit is selected automatically and the code is also read directly The subsequent steps deviate depending on the diagnostic protocol and type of code B Note Gateway control units represent an exception The Coding function cannot be selected for these control units 126 Diagnostic mode 6 6 2 2 1 Coding on KWP control units The Coding function for KWP control units is explained below There are two possible code types for these control units the short code and the long code The type of code depends on the control unit and cannot be changed by the user 1 Short code Results Orders Process 17 Dash Board KVVP2000 TP20 30920871 X 716147007 Contra Units subsystem ID KOMBIUNSTRUMENT wD Old code 104 New
57. code 104 17 COD p 4 Figure 6 105 Short code Apply Writes the code into the control unit Restore Enters the value last coded in the New code field Click on Apply to save the restored code to the control unit After opening the tab or selecting the desired subsystem the code is read out of the control unit and displayed in the Old code field The new value can be entered in the New code field and confirmed using the Enter key That enables the Apply button After pressing the Apply button a message appears with a confirmation prompt Encode Do you really want to encode Figure 6 106 Confirmation prompt before coding Yes Writes t ae luni 127 2 Diagnostic mode No Writing 1s not performed If coding was successful another message 1s displayed Status after writing the code e Encoding completed successfully Figure 6 107 Success message after coding After confirming the message the user is requested to reset the control unit Ignition reset e Please perform ignition reset Figure 6 108 Request to reset the ignition To do this switch the ignition key to the Off position and then back to its former position Now the old value is also displayed in the Old code display field followed by the original code value in brackets Old code 105 104 New code 105 Figure 6 109 New and old code This procedure may be repeated any number
58. data of a diagnostic session 2 The short protocol type includes the entire vehicle specific data of a diagnostic session without GFF data 304 Additional program functions 3 The function test protocol type includes the GFF data of a diagnostic session Select diagnostic log Select the desired log type Short log Function test log CK Cancel Figure 12 2 Selecting the diagnostic protocol OK The selected protocol type is printed or saved Cancel The selection of the protocol type is cancelled and the window is closed a Co Click on this button to open a Help window in the folder with the stored diagnostic protocols A diagnostic protocol that has already been saved as Html and XML or possibly as file with the extension b64 can be copied here A b64 file can thus be copied to an external storage medium such as a USB stick to send it from another tester we Send ext Click on this button to open a Windows file window for opening a b64 file This function can be used to load a diagnostic protocol in b64 format from an external storage medium such as a USB stick and then send it to Volkswagen if the Group system connection is not available at the original tester This button is already available after starting the application 305 Additional program functions 12 1 3 Diagnostic session Diagnostic session i Stop Click on this button to save the current diagnostic session to the sessi
59. event memories suided functions Figure 6 91 Manual identification of control units 116 Diagnostic mode Identify control unit The selected control unit is identified Read event memory If an identified control unit has event memory entries this button is enabled It can be used to re read the event memories of the control unit Read all event memories The event memories of all control units identified so far are re read Guided functions This button is enabled for an identified control unit It is used to open the guided functions available for the selected control unit in a selection window If a guided function is marked and you click on Execute Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service starts this function and switches to the Process tab for this If a control unit is not identified during manual identification Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens a message asking whether it is to be entered as installed manually Note iE il amp Control unit cannot be identified Do you want stil want to enter it as installed bose Figure 6 92 Entering a control unit as installed that has not been identified Yes The control unit is entered manually as installed The self diagnosis functions are not available No The control unit is not entered as installed gt Reference See chapters Diagnostic start up and Block diagram 2 Note Self diagnosis is only possible
60. f Warnungen Hinweise ER Volkswagen AG ba Jegliche Weitergabe Verbreitung oder Vervielfaltigung aber auch jegliche bestimmungswidrige und oder nicht der Interoperabilitat dienende Nutzung ist untersagt Ausnahme Vervielfaltigungen Ausdrucke zum betriebsinternen Gebrauch sind ohne schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Volkswagen AG erlaubt sofern es sich um einen innerbetrieblichen Zweck handelt Innerbetrieblich hei t hier Nutzung innerhalb des Betriebs mit identischer Betriebsnummer Ausnahme Ausdrucke der Wartungstabellen zu Arbeitszeiten und Messprotokolle d rfen an Kunden weitergegeben werden Die Weitergabe von technischem Know how sowie allgemeine technische Ausk nfte an anerkannte NORA Kunden nach den NORA Grundsatzen der VW AG sind auszugsweise zul ssig Ausgenommen hiervon sind ausdr cklich 1 Informationen Daten aus RESERVE bzgl der Reparaturhistorie 2 Informationen zu R ckrufaktionen 3 Inhalte des Informationsmittels Handbuch Service Technik 4 Informationen Daten zu Reparaturen von elektronischen Bauelementen Gew hrleistungsarbeiten werden ausschlie lich mit VW Original Teilen ausgef hrt Bei sonstigen Reparaturarbeiten sind die ber AposPro automatisch ausgew hlten Ersatzteile Empfehlungen Im brigen beachten Sie bitte die Regelungen von Artikel 5 und 6 des Service Vertrages Bitte lesen und beachten Sie diese ACHTUNG Vorsicht und Hinweisbeschreibungen bevor Sie Wartungs oder Reparaturarbe
61. further operating steps In addition the captions of the buttons in the operating area of the multimeter client area may deviate from the figure Structure of the operating area of the multimeter client area That depends on the device e g Pressure T P 1 and Temperature T P 2 instead of Pressure T P and Temperature T P 2 Note To be able to the start the measuring functions from function blocks 1 and 2 the correct measuring lead must be connected to the device sockets If this is not the case an error message will appear 2 Setting the test parameters If a measuring function has been successfully started in the operating area the specific test parameter buttons e g DC or AC measurement will be added to the respective function block If a test parameter is not available for the active measuring function the corresponding button will be inactive black e g if the Resistance URDI function is activated the AC button is inactive Figure 9 4 Test parameter buttons in function block 1 The characteristics of the test parameters are described below using the measurement option Voltage URDI in function block 1 as an example 201 Test Instruments mode 2 Setting the DC coupling Clicking on the button activates DC voltage or direct current measuring mode When a measurement option is started the DC voltage or direct current test parameter is automatically active provided this measuring mode is s
62. gt Drivetrain data BUS Fault in engine control module 4 GF m Con Mod J540 for vehicle type incorrect Coding ABS Control Module w EDL J104 Checking coding for ABS CM wEDL J104 Basic setting brake system Drivers Window Regulator Motor 1 47 4 d ie E Thermal protection central locking Coding of ABS Control Module J104 in the area of Electronic Parking Brake Control Module J540 requires the basic settings of the brake system and Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor G251 Perform test Select own test Figure 6 68 Test plan view The Test plan tab contains a table with the available tests This table has two columns Status This column has a symbol indicating the status of the test This symbol shows that the status is Test not yet performed Y This symbol shows that the status is ok This test was successful This symbol shows that a test has been cancelled by the user This symbol shows that the status is not ok The test failed This symbol shows that no status could be determined for the execution of the program a This symbol shows that diagnosis has been created and that the component has been repaired Tests This column contains the possible test programs sorted by their potential success Perform test This button is used to start a selected test For this Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches to the Process tab Documents This button can be us
63. ignition is identified as switched on on the vehicle If the ignition is switched off the Ignition is switched off dialogue appears lenition is switched off AS Before you continue please check whether the ignition of the connected vehicle is switched on Figure 6 10 Ignition is switched off 54 Diagnostic mode Repeat The ignition is re checked Continue The system resumes diagnostic start up Cancel Diagnostic start up is cancelled If the ignition status is not identified the Ignition status cannot be identified dialogue appears lenition status cannot be identified A The system was not able to identify whether the ignition of the connected vehicle is switched on ne reason for this might be the diagnostic hardware used Before you continue please check that the diagnostic connector is connected to the vehicle correctly Continue Cancel Figure 6 11 Ignition status cannot be identified Repeat The ignition status is re checked Continue The system resumes diagnostic start up Cancel Diagnostic start up is cancelled 2 Note The status of battery ignition and vehicle identification is checked during the following activities e Diagnostic start up e Reading the event memory of a control unit e Reading the event memories of all control units e Manual identification of a control unit e Diagnostic exit 1 Note Diagnostic start up may take several minutes
64. in the Extras VCI chapter Sl Diagnostic mode Importer Vehicle identification no Dealer Engine er fu B Order Modes A Test instruments B Flashing Welcome to the diagnostic program lagnosis Objective comprehensive diagnostic functionality E Info After you have connected the vehicle and the started the diagnosis the vehicle will be identified and the event iM Admin memory will be evaluated Then the Guided Fault Finding and Guided Functions functions will be available for diagnosis If you would like to work without a warranty order you can also use self diagnosis Data Extras Help Info J Connected to the vehicle Ignition switched on gt Start diagnosis 2 le Figure 6 6 Start window for diagnostic start up To start vehicle diagnosis diagnostic mode must be activated Whether the vehicle 1s connected and the ignition is switched on is shown in the start up window gt Start diagnosis Click on this button to start diagnostic start up Diagnostic start up runs on the Control units tab Once diagnostic start up has been started it can be cancelled by clicking on this button A diagnosis already performed can be ended using this button Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is not closed in this case 52 Diagnostic mode 2 Note Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service only provides the
65. installation folder sub directory drivers If a Bluetooth interface was selected a message will appear informing you that to use the VAS5054 according to the radio head documentation Bluetooth pairing needs to be established Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 em Bluetooth interface Bluetooth device connection You have selected a Bluetooth capable diagnostic interface To use the y455054 Bluetooth pairing needs to be established Please refer to the documentation for the radio head Figure 3 9 Message for Bluetooth interface Back Go back in the installation process one step 22 Installation Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is continued Cancel The installation is terminated 2 Note To install and use a diagnostic radio head please refer to the document Diagnostic radio head VAS 5054A Diagnostic interface VAS 5055 Installation and start up on VAS 5052A from Base CD 16 and VAS 6150 from Base CD 15 Version 1 11 With the Selection of the certificate file option a valid certificate is assigned to Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service The certificate is available in the form of a license dat 1 amp Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 Joga Selection of the certificate file NT Select the certificate file and click on Continue 2 the certificate C Datallicense dat Browse
66. is displayed as the measured value If the user performs this action this text disappears from the table of measured values and the process of defining settings is continued After configuring the default setting the newly configured measured values are displayed If the default setting was not successful a dialogue appears with an error message that needs to be confirmed by the user Depending on the type of error that occurred the messages may differ e g stating that communication with the vehicle could not be established After rectifying the problem the process of configuring the default settings can be repeated gt Reference See also Error messages chapter 139 Diagnostic mode 6 6 2 4 2 Default setting on UDS control units For UDS control units after selecting the default settings parameters can be additionally set and measured values selected To do this the following steps are required 1 Selecting the default settings 2 Parametrisation of the default settings 3 Selecting the measured values 4 Configuration of the default settings The individual steps are described in the following in detail Selecting the default settings ia units Results Orders Frocess I Dash Board UDSYISOTF SCOI2Z08ST7ZB 0206 7 X01 EY Kombi JDS MDD RMOS A040440 Default settings for UDS Select default settings Name Selection Resetting of all adaptation values Di 17 BAS p 4
67. keyboard is available in the table of shortcuts E Switches to the conduction of the actuator diagnosis A Switches back to the previous view Even if parameters are modified or actuators added or removed there the selection of measured values for the remaining actuators is retained Conduction of actuator diagnosis Results Orders Process 17 Dash Board UDS ISOTP f 30920872B 70206 FAO FEV_kombi_U DS_VYDD_FRMDS A04040 Control units Actuator diagnosis Status not active Measured values of selected actuators Name Value DEQOU286 Segment test On VO infinite time ILO EOO28 3 Gang On VO infinite time IBENDZEN Speedometer On MO infinite time j Cyerall measured values Name Value Ital MA amp SO01 24 LN Volumen 2540 2560in20ml 1240 ml JO lt 17 DTM x Figure 6 140 UDS actuator diagnosis IDEOOFOQOLES Max oil level in service interval The actual actuator diagnosis is performed in this view At the top the selected actuators and closed by default to start with the corresponding measured values are displayed in a tree structure Click on to display these measured values The actuator parameters and their values are displayed if you move the mouse pointer over an actuator All global measured values for actuators are displayed in the tree structure at the bottom 156 Diagnostic mode Measured values may be combined to groups In this case there is
68. met Hardware requirements 2 PCMCIA slot with EDIC card or Bluetooth via VAS5054 or USB cable to VAS5054 2 PT boxes and VAS 5055 2 CPU from 1Ghz and higher recommended RAM gt 512 MB 2 Hard drive space gt 10 GB Tester hardware supported VAS5051B VAS5052A vAS6150 vAS6150A From the 4th quarter of 2011 the following tester hardware will also be supported VAS6150B VAs6160 Software requirements 2 Windows XP SP3 or Windows 2000 2 Java Runtime Environment 1 5 0_11 2 Libraries DLL for Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 vcredist_x86 exe included in Windows XP SP3 2 Note The libraries installed for Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 are normally available in the directory c Windows Win SxS and start with x86_Microsoft_VC80_CRT Without this data a test device cannot create a hardware key meaning that no licence can be acquired in Offboard Diagnostic Information System eShop for the device If the required data is not available the local administrator needs to be consulted 15 Chapter 3 Installation This chapter deals with the process of installing Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 2 Note If an older version of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is already installed on the device it needs to be uninstalled first before starting to install the current Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service To install uninstall and configure Offboard Diagnosti
69. of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program Hame OdisLauncher Publisher Unknown keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections from the Internet or a network If you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock it When should unblock a program Figure 14 2 Windows firewall message To confirm this message click on the Unblock button 348 Error messages 2 Note If you click on the Keep Blocking button the firewall blocks the execution of the update and the program cancels the attempt 14 2 2 Browser messages In some cases browser security warnings may be displayed These messages come after starting Offboard Diag nostic Information System Service and after selecting certain tabs that access a web Group interface for the first time Security Alert x g Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s secuinty certificate ity The secunty certificate was sued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority The secunty certificate date i walid The secunty certificate has a valid name matching the name of the page you are trying to view Do you want to proceed Yves Ho Figure 14 3 Browser security message Conf
70. of times If coding was not successful due to an invalid value or other problems a corresponding error message informs the user of this and the current code is not changed Depending on the type of error that occurred the messages may differ e g stating that communication with the vehicle could not be established After rectifying the problem coding can be repeated Any example of an error message is shown in the following figure Error DS2502E Infrastructure Data does not exist Possible causes ODS data input incorrect no suitable DTS project this function is not intended for the control unit Figure 6 110 Error message during coding due to missing data 128 Long code Diagnostic mode With the long code the values to be coded are displayed in the form of a bit field consisting of up to 32 bytes It is displayed in binary and in hexadecimal representation It is displayed in the same way as for the binary code for UDS control units gt Reference See UDS binary code 6 6 2 2 2 Coding on UDS control units For UDS control units there is a binary code and a plain text code These are different representations of the same type of code If supported by data input after calling the Code function and possibly selecting the subsystem the plain text code is displayed by default Otherwise the binary code is displayed P UDS binary code and KWP long code The representation of the binary code for UDS cont
71. om Figure 6 30 Editing the coding status The coded or not coded setting can be edited To do this mark the control unit using the mouse and click on the coding status on the right to open the listbox for making a Selection Coded means that the control unit is included in the target installation Not coded means that the control unit is not included in the target installation Code The changes to the coding setting are applied and the installation list is re read If there are still differences between the actual installation and the target installation the dialogue is displayed again Close Checking of the installation is stopped and the existing code is accepted D Note For the following automatic identification of the control units a reading plan is compiled in which all control units are listed which are addressed independently by the system during identification The reading plan consists of information of the MCD project the gateway installation list and the control unit nodes of the equipment network The list is thus limited to those control units that are very probably installed in the vehicle 69 Diagnostic mode If control units indicated in the equipment network as correctly installed are not identified during automatic identification it is possible to read them out again The dialogue opens Control units not identified installed correctly Control units not identified installed correctly The following c
72. possible using the Zoom function in order to evaluate a detail that has been zoomed in on In the function area use the respective button to select between Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Use the mouse or the touchscreen to move the respective cursor ET in the display area along the recorded signal curve The current position is displayed in the amplitude and time function area F m The orange arrow buttons in the operating area can be used to position the marking cursor more precisely in the grid If both cursors are active the difference in amplitude and time between the cursor positions is shown in the function area instead of amplitude and time Onote The amplitude values and the difference in amplitude in the function area are shown in the colour of the respective channel If both channels are active the values are shown one below the other The time value is the same for both channels 9 3 5 Trigger parametrisation 226 Test Instruments mode To change the trigger settings click on the Trigger mode button After the function has been activated the re spective parametrisation dialogue appears in the operating area Multimeter Oscilloscope Figure 9 20 Parametrisation of the trigger If a channel has already been parametrised the relevant settings for this channel are automatically accepted for the trigger It is not necessary to define any further settings for the trigger in this case If no chann
73. right Draw measuring mode serves to display low frequency or slow signals e g lambda probe Long term measurement is also possible in this measuring mode gt Reference See also Long term measurement chapter Onote High frequency or fast signals cannot be displayed in Draw measuring mode A timebase from 0 2 to 100 s div can be set The Trigger mode function for parametrising the trigger is not available after Draw measuring mode has been activated 2 Note In case a signal curve is not displayed after Auto Setup measuring mode has been started check the following points in this order 1 Is the DSO measuring lead connected correctly to the device socket and the signal source 2 Has channel parametrisation been performed correctly Have the desired measurement options been as signed correctly to the channel e g channel A ls assigned to DSO1 Reference See chapter Channel parametrisation 3 Are measuring mode and if necessary the trigger set correctly Reference See chapter Setting the measuring mode 4 Finally automatic setup should be repeated 9 3 4 Long term measurement in draw mode 222 Test Instruments mode 2 Note Long term measurements can only be performed in Draw measuring mode This function is not available in any of the other measuring modes After Draw measuring mode has been activated the Long term measurement function is available in the func tion area
74. selected test procedure The following functions can be selected Freeze frame The cyclic repetition of the measurement is stopped and the last diagram is displayed In addition the Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 buttons appear Freeze frame Reference See also chapter Freeze frame e Channel A and channel B Parametrisation of channels A and B a Cy Reference 214 Test Instruments mode See also chapter Channel parametrisation e Trigger mode Trigger parametrisation Trigger mode Reference See also chapter Trigger parametrisation e Measuring mode Setting the measuring mode Measuring mode Reference See also chapter Setting the test parameters e Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Setting the start point end point of a mark Reference See also chapter Freeze frame e Bandwidth limit Activating deactivating the band pass filter The bandwidth limit is already active after starting the Oscilloscope client area Bandwidth limitation Reference See also chapter Bandwidth limit e Target curves Recording and playing target curves Target curves gt Reference See also chapter Target curves function 9 3 1 Image position and time base In the default setting of the digital storage oscilloscope the arrow buttons shown in the operating area can be used to set the image position and the timebase for the signal curves 215 Test Instruments mode e Image position The
75. started the diagnosis the vehicle will be identified and the event 4 Admin memory will be evaluated Then the Guided Fault Finding and Guided Functions functions will be available for diagnosis If you would like to work without a warranty order you can also use self diagnosis Data Extras Help Info X Connect to the vehicle gt 4 Switch on ignition yasni gt Start diagnosis 2 Ls le Figure 6 4 Start up window after starting the application After Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service has been started the user interface is displayed in diagnostic mode without any vehicle data The diagnostic hardware is identified first This process may take some minutes 50 Diagnostic mode 2 Note Lesebestatigung Funkverbindung Es ist in Ihrem Land gesetzlich verboten eine Funkverbindung zur Fahrzeugdiagnose zu versenden M chten Sie fortfahren Ja Mein Figure 6 5 Bluetooth connection not permitted Yes Bluetooth is used on your own responsibility No A Bluetooth connection is not established The use of Bluetooth connections is not permitted in every country If communication with the vehicle is es tablished via Bluetooth connection e g VAS5054 in one of these countries Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service will inform you about this in a message gt Reference A detailed description of how to change the diagnostic hardware is available
76. the Volkswagen server 358 Oscilloscope D PDU API Platform Protocols KW1281 KW2000 KW6000 UDS Provider Proxy server Test plan Test step Readiness code Release notes Screenshot Sensor Server Reliably installed control unit Target installation Start module Control unit Touchscreen TPL Traversion test Glossary Measuring and display device for electrical signals that displays the progres sion of the signal strength in time e g oscillations D PDU API is a standardised software interface for connecting diagnostic interfaces to the diagnostic software The keyword protocols define the exact procedure for data exchange be tween control unit and tester Older control units communicate according to KW1281 Newer control units work according to KW2000 or KW6000 CAN diagnosis ASAM control units according to UDS During vehicle self diag nosis prior to the selection of the diagnostic functions for a control unit the tester automatically determines its keyword protocol version A service provider offering communication services such as telephone mo bile communications or Internet A proxy server is equivalent to a switching centre between clients and another network It accepts requests from a client and forwards its data possibly in modified or anonymous form to the original destination in the other network e g Internet Proxy servers are able to temporarily store the data l
77. the default setting selected or for the overall entry on the left hand side Like for the selection of default settings the measured values to be displayed can be selected here The right hand list contains the selected measured values It is empty to start with gt Moves the selected measured values from the left hand list into the right hand list gt Moves all measured values into the right hand list Moves the selected measured values from the right hand list into the left hand list Moves all measured values into the left hand list The list of selected measured values can be sorted To do this select exactly one measured value from the right hand list Moves the entry up one position Moves the entry down one position Switches to the execution of the default settings Switches back to the previous view Even if parameters are modified or default settings added or removed there the selection of measured values for the remaining default settings is retained 143 Diagnostic mode Configuration of the default settings Results Orders Control units Sage I Dash Board UDSFISOTF SCUIZDSFZE fO206 x01 EV Kombi UCS VDD RMOa 404040 Default settings for UDS Status not active Measured values of selected default settings Name Value IDOEO0498 Resetting of all adaptation values VO A Oyeral measured yalues Name Value ke IIBEOOFOO _ES Max oil le
78. to create an order manually For this a standard order for working with manual order number is marked in the list Enter no Click on this button to open a window for entering the manual order number required here Select order Flash start up is continued with the manual order Without order If work is to be performed without an order flash start up is continued if you click on this button Reference See also Selecting an order chapter The selection of the order is thus completed 175 Flash mode 7 3 Identifying control units After selecting the order identification of the control units is started Flashing Identificating a vehicle Starting a flash session an order Figure 7 12 Identify control units section Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service displays a progress dialogue for identifying control units Steuerger teidentifikation durchf hren Da 1 Zvon 25 Figure 7 13 Control unit identification Cancel flash start up Flash start up is cancelled Once control unit identification is completed Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens the Spe cial functions tab and displays the flash programs available for the identified vehicle in a list 176 Flash mode 7 6 Using flash programs After identifying the control units programs for flashing can be executed Figure 7 14 Execute flash programs section Offboard Diagnostic Infor
79. to the Group systems are required for login Apply The login data is sent to the Group systems Cancel The login data is discarded Authorised dealers may repeat login at all times el This button is available in all views of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service that obtain data from Group systems It can be used to repeat login at all times 2 Note Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service only provides the option of diagnosis and flashing for the licensed brands Which vehicle models of this brand are available depends on the type of dealer of a brand in the licence All vehicle models are available to a licensed authorised dealer dealer type H Only EU vehicles are available to a licensed unaffiliated market participant dealer type U of a brand It s possible to check the contents of the licence in the administration area gt See also Administration General Licence info An unaffiliated market participant must log on to the Group systems online at the start of a diagnostic or flash session to enable diagnostic or flash start up If login is cancelled Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service returns to the start screen After login Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service displays the remaining duration of validity of the diagnostic flat rate in days and hours in the Information area of the user interface under Time remaining In addition the orders and vehicle history are not avai
80. tzt Figure 6 97 Warning if adaptation is not supported OK The message is closed The individual self diagnosis functions are described in the following chapters 6 6 2 Control unit specific functions 6 6 2 1 Adaptation Depending on whether the adaptation is to be performed on KWP or UDS control units configuration and operation will deviate 121 Diagnostic mode 6 6 2 1 1 Control units with KWP protocol For KWP control units after switching to the Adaptation view all adaptation channels of the selected control unit are displayed in a list The channels are numbered and sorted in ascending order A maximum of 255 channels can be used per control unit All 255 channels are always displayed regardless of whether they are actually being used by the current control unit Frocess 17 Dash Board KWFZOO0 TFZOFSCOI20S 71 X 1614007 Results Orders Control units Language E I Old value defaultvalue Testvalue Input nit Channel 1 1 1 1 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel Select channel Sophy Hesel 17 CALI ax Figure 6 98 Adaptation KWP New adaptation values can be entered in the table It has four columns Old value default value The adaptation value read out of the control unit Test value The current test value Initially identical to the value in the Old value default value column Input The value entered by t
81. variant rule Installation list Installation status Verification Workshop code Certificate Glossary Unified Diagnostic Services as per ISO 14229 standardised protocol for con trol unit communication based on KW2000 for ASAM ODX control units Software modification package for updating an existing software product to a higher version status 1 New version of the processing system imported from CD ROM 2 New program version of a vehicle system imported from the tester Abbreviation for Uniform Resource Locator A URL corresponds to the address of an Internet resource website file Example http www volkswagen de The term is used in the context of the equipment of vehicle systems Some equipment e g an airbag may be available in different variants for an identi fied vehicle The main purpose of the vehicle system test is to find out which variant is actually installed If the variant cannot be determined automatically Yes No questions relating to the equipment will follow e g Automatic gear box The mechanisms for determining the variants are referred to as variant rules Their results determine which diagnostic data is provided List of the control units installed in a vehicle Licence document in which all authorisations scopes and properties of the software and diagnostic data are stored The certificate is the prerequisite for the operation of the test software which is checked every time the applic
82. verification configured here can only be used if a corresponding Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service licence has been acquired A verification point must be specified in this licence which must correspond to the tester specified here 302 Chapter 12 Additional program functions This chapter describes those functions that are available across all different modes These additional program functions or standard functions consist of three menus e The Data menu e The Extras menu e The Help menu 12 1 Data The Data menu contains the following four function areas e Current view e Diagnostic protocol e Diagnostic session e Hotfix Data Curent view in Frint Diagnostic log oy Send k Save W Frint a Sendext Diagnostic session a Stop Hatfix 4 Get Delete Figure 12 1 Data button 303 Additional program functions 2 Note After an Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service software or data update the diagnostic session data of a predecessor version cannot be loaded any more since software version and DIDB version deviate To resume an interrupted diagnostic session by loading the diagnostic session data the software and DIDB versions must match Cy Reference See System environment in the Administration chapter 12 1 1 Current view Current view I Print Click on this button to create and print a screenshot of the current view The
83. with control units identified or entered as installed Calling self diagnosis functions For self diagnosis you must left click for about second or right click on a control unit marked as installed which opens a context menu with the self diagnosis buttons 117 Diagnostic mode Test instruments OO Identify control unit auided functions Control unit self diagnosis Venicle self diagnosis Figure 6 93 Starting self diagnosis e Control unit self diagnosis Click on this button to open the Self diagnosis functions selection window with self diagnosis functions for the control unit selected Self diagnosis functions Gateway Adaptation na Event memory Default setting Identification Measured values Actuator diagnosis Access authorisation Execute Cancel Figure 6 94 Selection window for control unit self diagnosis The name of the control unit is displayed in the window Execute The selected function is executed To do this Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches to the Results tab with the exception of the Access authorisation function Cancel No function is executed and the window is closed You can choose between Adaptation Code Event memory Default setting Identification Measured values Actuator diagnosis and Access authorisation e Vehicle self diagnosis Click on this button to open the Self diagnosis functions sele
84. work On closing Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service the following message appears 36 Update Updates available 2 Updates are available Would you like to perform an update now Figure 4 8 Update message after exiting Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Yes The update is continued as described above No No update is initiated This does not change the update cycle 37 Chapter 5 Application start user interface This chapter gives a brief introduction to the user interface of Offboard Diagnostic System Information Service and how to use it For individual functions described here there are references to other chapters of the manual if more detailed descriptions are available Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is started after installing it via the Windows start menu ffboard Diagnostic Information System Service Fi Manuals Figure 5 1 Starting Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service The virtual keyboard can also be started using the Windows start menu under Keyboard After completing the start procedure the user interface is displayed in diagnostic mode In addition a window appears with warnings and notes that must be observed r Warnungen Hinweise 5 Volkswagen AG Jegliche Weitergabe Verbreitung oder Vervielf ltigung aber auch jegliche bestimmungswidrige und oder nicht der Interoperabilitat dienende Nutzung ist untersagt Ausnahme Vervielfalti
85. 00000000 IIIIIIII IT DDL ED 10 2 3 9 French JIIHIDISIISIITTI TKI TIKIT WITIOVHIOUWUOY 558b IW ITOIIII0E I AltGr IDOIIHIIDIIOIITT ADELS EN IKT WYNYJIINYE I ci 248 Virtual keyboard manual JIIIEIUIULIILIIIT I nom IDODOOOOOOODDDO 2980 IIIIIIII III DDL ED 10 2 3 10 Greek IOIIHIIDIIIIITT SI KIT ITI WOES OWVWOWWOUUE JIIIVIIIIIIIOHE I AltGr DWAJA IIIEAIIIII ID I IAAODDBWWDOD DLL O IIITIIIDIEFIUII EI I JOOW AI IMOUOUYI a een IOTIOTIE 249 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 11 Italian Onooaaoonoooonc 989 SEELE DO 5985 Daawowuuwmwuoc I OO O DOIHEOHEHLIISITTI IYI III ITI IT IK ASOT IWODIO IIIIAIIIOE I I OG SeeesceEesCscsecEes ee JG 2 ILIOIIIIIII SU erg SOLID 0000000000000 IIIIIIIOE DO CL je 250 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 12 Japanese 10 2 3 12 1 Direct input 5 GEH OOOO OHH MYIAIIYJIVY VGIVIIIIEY a III FELD 155 anonnDDDD Z IIIHEHDTITIHTN Ctrl DOODOwaODODDGDOC IWS IIIT ITT WIT IVIWOOOW B SHIITIT CC EICH 10 2 3 12 2 Hiragana soocoeoooseoocEs SOTTO IT DBaDgGDDDDDgBw gt IIIIIITTIIIN OO JOO ZUUWUOOODODODDDOD a 0000000550 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 12 3 Katakana SouvoecoecoocEs SII IIE IT macensoos0000 Sa amp JIIITTIIIVD UL cc OOOO NA III E ZOLL OGGee0e00ez0 0 0c ED C3 3
86. 1 4L TDI PIS HN Finally select the vehicle engine in the Engine pop up menu 2 Note The selection of the basic characteristics from the pop up menus of GMD for unaffiliated market participants is limited toEUS vehicles Diagnostic mode 2 Note If the vehicle is changed during a diagnostic session Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service re reads the VIN and indicates the change of vehicle Fahrzeuswec hsel Ein Fahrzeugwechsel wurde w hrend der laufenden Diagnosesitzung erkannt Every change of vehicle is entered in the diagnostic protocol ab Note The individual pop up menus will not be active until a selection has been made in the pop up menu above Click on Apply to accept the basic vehicle characteristics The vehicle has been identified 6 2 3 Login to Group systems The next step after identifying the vehicle is login to the Group systems Diagnostic Start up Identificating control units Selec ng an order Figure 6 18 Login to Group systems section To login Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens a login window 1 Login Global user ID Password Figure 6 19 Login window to the Group systems 60 Diagnostic mode Login takes place once per session The global user ID and the password for access to the Group systems are required for login Apply The login data is sent to the Group systems Cancel The login data
87. 10 Figure 6 112 User input for binary code If one of the two values is changed the corresponding binary or hexadecimal value is automatically updated during input Closing the dialogue discards the changes Apply The changes are added to the table Cancel The changes are discarded Once all changes have been made as desired the checksum corresponding to the code string must be entered in the Checksum text field It can be calculated as follows The code string is split up into 2 byte groups If the byte number is odd the value 00 is attached to the end of the byte The values are added up any out of range value is cut off 130 Diagnostic mode 0 Example Code string FO 01 02 04 08 10 20 F001 0204 0810 2000 11A15 amp OxFFFF 1A15 Checksum 1A15 To write the code into the control unit the user must click on the Apply button Before saving the code a query appears Encode Do you really want to encode Figure 6 113 Confirmation prompt before binary coding Yes The code string is checked for errors using the checksum No Coding is cancelled If Reset control units is ticked an automatic reset is performed after coding i e the control unit is auto matically switched off and back on again If not the user will need to perform a manual reset after coding 1 e switch the ignition key once to the Off position and then back to its former position If there is no
88. 129 140 152 159 Unaffiliated market participants 53 173 Update 33 273 273 URDI measuring lead Continuity test 208 Current measurement 204 Diode test 206 Resistance measurement 205 Voltage measurement 203 User interface 40 V Variant 59 81 VAS5054 22 Vehicle engine 59 Vehicle ID 41 Vehicle status 53 Vehicle specific functions 161 Virtual keyboard 281 Voltage measurement DSO measuring lead 209 URDI measuring lead 203 W Warnings 333 Windows security alert 348 Workshop code 146 Workshop manuals 192 355 Glossary Amplitude Adaptation ASAM ODX Mode Bluetooth Client Diagnosis Diagnostic connection Diagnostic object Diagnostic protocol DIDB Direct current measurement inline current measurement DISS The maximum value that the deflection of an oscillation of an alternating cur rent e g an AC voltage may have This service permits the interactive modification of parameters of the ad dressed control system The modified values e g correction values for no load speed can also be saved permanently to the control units The user is given the option of changing the value and transferring it to the non volatile memory RAM for checking The control unit creates the new values at its outputs and the user is able to check the system s reaction If the correct cor rection value is found the tester arranges for the control unit to transfer the value and the workshop cod
89. 2 1 3 2 Continuing a repair To continue a repair the diagnostic session data can be re applied The menu with the buttons is described in detail above Reference See also chapter Data When a diagnostic session is in progress no other diagnostic session can be resumed which is why this button is then greyed out It is only possible to resume diagnostic sessions if diagnostic start up was not performed If you click on the Continue button the Windows dialogue appears for loading a file Look in sessions amp emam sl WWiW2223CZ8E000085 2010 12 14 _14 17 15 ses a i My Recent Documents PE My Computer amp File name wwwzzz3CZBE000085 2010 12 14_14 17 1 My Network Files of type ses Figure 12 6 Loading a diagnostic session file The desired diagnostic session file must be selected here Open The diagnostic session is loaded Cancel Loading the diagnostic session is cancelled 308 Additional program functions 2 Note The vehicle state i e the state of the control units addressability identification data and event memory entries must not be changed between the saving and loading of the diagnostic session data If the vehicle state is changed Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service displays an error message with a note on the modified data Error x The stored vehicle has a different vehicle identification number AAAA SB EOOO0S
90. 2 Note Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service cannot be closed while the control unit list is being created Diagnostic mode The current progress of diagnostic start up is shown at the bottom right of the user interface Extended diagnosis has been started Read control units 38 CE Figure 6 12 Status area example determining the VIN 6 2 2 Basic characteristics dialogue GMD The next section describes the identification of a vehicle according to its basic characteristics Diagnostic start up Login ta Group Syslems Salacting an order Ldentificating control units Figure 6 13 GMD execution section The main element is the Basic vehicle characteristics GMD dialogue Basic vehicle characteristics VIN Manufacturer Model year fariant Engine Working with guided fault finding Figure 6 14 Dialogue for selecting the basic vehicle characteristics If the ignition status is OK the vehicle identification number VIN is read out of the vehicle and the Basic vehicle characteristics dialogue appears for selecting the basic vehicle characteristics 56 Diagnostic mode The VIN can be corrected manually if required by switching the vehicle identification from automatic to manual A detailed description of how to switch between automatic and manual is given below Cancel Vehicle identification and thus diagnostic start up is cancelled Whe
91. 3 19 Internet opuons Tor Interner Explorer He ei 31 4 1 Data update Vid ne work ana ee 33 AD Connectine To update ste so nen Bis ns 34 AS Displaying available updates u a a a a u aO 34 No updates aa 35 4 5 Displaying the progress of a data update pp 35 4 6 Message relating to an update when the preconfigured time has passed pp 36 4 7 Message relating to an update when data is available pp 36 4 8 Update message after exiting Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service en 37 5 1 Starting Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service pp 38 3 2 Window With WalnInes NOLES Parl ad ee rs pea aa 38 5 3 Window with warnings notes part 2 py 39 5 4 The Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service user interface pe 40 Jor Ihe INlOrmal GE 40 3 05 Modes Ne 42 5 1 Standard functions MENUS dd ernennen 43 Sie 44 5 9 JE Xtras SUDBe NU ae Renee Me Niere a N 44 5 10 Help sub U Bu BR eae aa 45 SO 45 3 12 Stas area example test plan ealen lat on an ee Be 45 6 1 Diasnostie startup OO 48 0 2 Diasnosic stin 0p SECULO es is Dali 49 Go START IAS MOSIS SC clio a a en ri esse 50 6 4 Start up window after starting the application pp 50 6 5 Bluetooth connection NOU permitted en 51 6 6 Start window or Gidone slic Startup a BE 32 6 1 No vebicle connected or ee EEE ana arena 53 O25 INO SENCE Connected ee ee ee 54 6 9 Vehicle identification not POSShe ae A E A a E AT eia 54 6 10 Tenition 1s Switched OH aka 54 6 11 Igni
92. 4 FS F Fr FS Fa FiD Fit riz mer Blog Pausa Part Despi JOHIOHIHDLTIIITTI BLOOD JE AISI OOIIIWOOOO IIIIIVNIIIE oO ea Oc VW HVLUVVVUVUL I JOO UR LIDL 2 IR OWS 200 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 24 Taiwan Bopomofo SHHHIHIIYHIHITI JI OI amp OOGWOEBOOBULD 998 CH cs EEE EI CB III IUITIEA I neun nun IIGAIBVIOOI II SSI IIIT AT ITD OOOO i O 10 2 3 25 Taiwan ChaJei 2 3 4 TI GV AIIVYVQIIS I ISSEWoyoyawyWWwod DD pe JaDSDUUWG 2 cs cc Virtual keyboard manual I NI I TI JJW Aet mn I990 SS Boy ae elves ns Home Palp JWA D We UII YYU as I YVINJOWIW I gt FE as JWL 10 2 3 26 Thal IODIIIIIIIIIT IIIT WWWOOUUUU AOU TDIGIITIITTITIE I UL Cj 8909990959000 SEINEN UNUUDOODWOODDC Saosessoonocs CH CH C 262 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 27 Czech IHEHIIHHITHIITTI Jj EC Ian 3985 TIIIETIHITDIIIE I DLL Je Doaowoonaoomoc SOME NEO gt VIIEIHIRIITI 2 00H IVONWAOIE I Je ms BOO GCS ee eee SR Bei maou II VUILL _ ICH CH EEE EB 10 2 3 28 Turkish JYAIMYIPG IIVYQIII WII III SEID TDIITIITTFITTIIIE DLL Cc 203 Virtual keyboard manual BOOOH8HODODIVO STITT III LITT WI TIIWIWOSIOOX CH CD Je IVAW IAI DID enna IIIIIIII III _ ED ICH CEE JIIIIIIIIIIII II IIIIIIIIUII II R ZELOO ILL en 10 2 3 29 Hungarian
93. 4E Connection to was interrupted Please try again If you are still unable to log in please contact Support ODSI1005E Transmission problem occurred with connec Please try again or contact Support tion to Connection interrupted ODS1006E Unable to connect with the URI URL The address entered is not responding or react ing at the moment Please try again later or contact Support ODS1007E _ Negative response from server The error ID is Please contact Support ODSI008E _ Negative response from server Please contact Support ODSIS501E The version of the selected session is not com Please contact Support patible with the current program version The session cannot be loaded ODS1502E The type of the selected session is not com Please contact Support patible with the current product The session cannot be loaded mined The session cannot be loaded 337 Error messages ODS2006E Hardware with ID is marked as blocked Login was attempted with a diagnostic tester the Please contact your support specialist hardwareID of which is disabled by the server Please contact Support ODS2007E Your flat rate has expired Please contact your Please acquire a new flat rate if you are an unaf support specialist filiated market participant Please contact Support if you are an authorised dealer ODS2008E The maximum number of concurrent user ses Pl
94. 6 Vehicle view You can use this button to reload content Authorised dealers can log on to the Group systems here again 194 Info mode 8 7 PR no tab The table on the PR No tab shows the equipment numbers for the selected vehicle Diagnostic start up must be performed first for this Campaigns History Yiring diagrams Manuals Vehicle PR a Documents Vehicle PR number A8C AZO BOB B12 C27 Figure 8 17 PR no view e You can use this button to reload content Authorised dealers can log on to the Group systems here again 195 Chapter 9 Test instruments mode 9 1 Test instruments in general To access Test instruments mode click on the Test instruments button on the user interface of the start screen in the Modes area right edge of the screen fy Test instruments Test instruments mode allows the user to perform measurements independently without guided fault finding using test instruments that can be parametrised Test results are displayed numerically or graphically on the screen gt Reference See also chapter Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service user interface 2 The multimeter user interface is automatically active after starting Importer wehicle identification no WW DU 73047 P01 4862 Dealer Engine AHA Order Multimeter Oscilloscope Data Extras Help Info 27M of 32M I Figure 9 1 Test instruments user interface Multimeter
95. 8 UDS measured value selection This view can be used to select measured values for every actuator displayed during the conduction of the actuator tests In addition global measured values can be selected for actuators Segment test vi Speedometer Segment test Figure 6 139 Selecting the actuator The pop up menu at the top lists all previously selected actuators The first entry is always the overall value to which the measured values are assigned that do not apply to a specific actuator but to the entire control unit The left hand list displays the measured values available for the selected actuator or for the overall entry Like for the selection of actuators the measured values to be displayed can be selected here The right hand list contains the selected measured values It is empty to start with Clicking on a measured value in one of the two lists enables the buttons for moving lt Moves the selected measured values into the left hand list gt Moves the selected measured values into the right hand list Ch Moves all measured values into the left hand list gt Moves all measured values into the right hand list 155 4 Diagnostic mode The list of selected measured values can be sorted P gt Moves the selected entry up one position W Moves the selected entry down one position gt Reference The measured values can also be selected using the keyboard Information on using the
96. 959702N 09XX Tuer SG 004 52 1 Tuerelektronik hinten links 1K0959703K 09XX Tuer SG 004 72 1 Tuerelektronik hinten rechts 1K0959704K 09XX Tuer SG 004 03 0 Bremsenelektronik 03 Bremsenelektronik 3C0614109A 0001 ESP 440C4 H018 53 0 Feststellbremse 53 Feststellbremse 3C0907801E 0003 EPB VC8HCO03 013 g4 Lenkwinkelgeber 44 0 Lenkhilfe 1K1909144L 1806 EPS_ZFLS Kl 138 HON 15 0 Airbag SCO909605N 2522 18 AIRBAG VWI8R 030 25 0 Wegfahrsicherung 3C0959433AA 0383 IMMO 051 56 0 Leuchtweitenregelung 5MO907357A X014 AFS Steuergeraet m 0 Reifendruckueberwachung 3C0959433AA 0420 RDK bel LAIR_ na tl enkceas laenslaltranik IR ankradslaltramnilA ff TNIETLAQGU ANTE INO Vernetzungsplan Steuerger teliste Ereignisspeicherliste Figure 6 32 View of the control unit list The Control units list shows the control units installed in vehicles with a full options package The control units installed in the vehicle are displayed in black The control units not identified are displayed in grey Control units subsequently entered as installed are displayed in black italics Control units with event memory entries are displayed in red The Control units table has three columns Address column The Address column shows the diagnostic address for each control unit Event column The Event column shows the number of event memory entries for each control unit Name column The Name column shows th
97. Abbreviation for Internet Protocol Address Every computer connected to a computer network TCP IP has a unique IP address It consists of four groups of numbers separated by dots e g 194 0 0 135 IP addresses can be assigned automatically by DHCP servers Precise adjustment of a test instrument e g clamp on ammeter according to specifications and correction of a measuring deviation by the compensation of systematic errors You can use the test instruments for independent measurements the results of which are displayed numerically or graphically on the tester A multimeter and an oscilloscope DSO are available A defined group of measured values read out of a vehicle system A software package installed e g locally on the dealer server and that pro vides data there such as the update programs for VAS 505x The dealer server is connected to the headquarters and receives the latest updates from there Within the workshop every tester connected to the LAN collects the latest programs automatically when switched on or explicitly when the Network update function is executed in the administration area There is no active connection to a communication network Active connection to a communication network such as the workshop net work Volkswagen s partner network or the Internet See also Online connec tion A protocol that is sent to a vehicle manufacturer via online connection External connection e g to the Internet or
98. Advanced tab activate the Default user account settings OK The changes are applied and the window is closed Cancel The changes are not applied and the window is closed Apply The changes are applied and the window is not closed Restart the system The languages are now available 212 Administration mode 2 General update How frequently Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is to search mirror server 2 for updates can be set under Planning in Update details General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand design Details on Update Planning Language Update Update cycle in days 1 System logging Time for update 12 00 Licence information Update on Monday Update on Tuesday System environment O O Update on Wednesday U Global configuration Update on Thursday GFF sequence Update on Friday O Update on Saturday O Update on Sunday O 0 Start update after s Figure 11 6 Update view Update cycle in days 1 needs to be entered as the default value in this text field That means that available program updates are searched for every day after the program has been started for the first time If you enter 0 under Update cycle Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service will start without searching for program updates Alternatively you can enter the desired update cycle in days here For example if you would like to look
99. All details of the customer code are displayed in a table for the selected complaint in the Overall view of customer code window If this function button is selected in combination with a marked blank line the window with the Coding wizard opens Extend test plan The Transfer diagnostic objects to test plan window appears in which the diagnostic objects linked to available codes are displayed These diagnostic objects can be added to the test plan Not all complaints have linked diagnostic objects The test plan cannot be extended in these cases A detailed explanation of this function is available later on in this section Reference See also Extend test plan section Display TPI list All TPI that corresponds to a customer code of a selected complaint are displayed if available The application automatically switches to the TPI tab and opens the Display TPI window on the TPI list tab This function is only available for complaints from the DISS system and for customer complaints with all mandatory fields filled For access to DISS login to the Group systems is required 89 Diagnostic mode Steuerger te Auftr ge plss TP Prufplan De DISS BA ID Kundenliveaussage Kundencodierung TPl aus DISS TPI manuell 12345 Komische Fahrger usche Karosserie An und Einbauten gt T ren gt Optik Oberfl che 186217 12345 SMS geht nicht Information Navigation Kommunikation Unterhaltung Kurzmitteilunge
100. B periphery devices during an active measurement since that could result in the loss of data 2 Cancelling the long term measurement To stop a long term measurement before it is finished click on the Freeze frame button The data measured so far can be evaluated despite the cancellation The text Long term measurement cancelled appears in the display area 2 Evaluating the long term measurement After a long term measurement has been finished the Cursor 1 and Zoom buttons are displayed The Zoom button is only available if the Cursor 1 button is not active It serves to zoom in on a detail of the signal curve There are two methods for increasing the size of a section of the recorded signal curve using the Zoom function e If you click on the curve section to be increased in size this section is immediately displayed across the entire width of the display area with the minimum timebase 225 Test Instruments mode e Click on the starting point of the curve area to be zoomed in on hold down the right or left button and move the cursor to the desired end point Two cursors are shown for better orientation The selected area will then be zoomed in on across the entire width of the display area After the area has been selected blue arrow buttons are shown in the operating area Use these buttons to move the selected area to the left or right To activate the cursor function click on the Cursor 1 button This is also
101. Control units Results Orders Event code SAE code Event text active Refresh 00381 Instrument cluster data bus y EN DO4 No signalicommunication Cin cycles Type Name value amp 8 EC 2 sec Event code 00381 004 N Time w Friority 2 Es Frequency counter 2 Ereignisspeicher Elimination counter i iu Mileage 1 km Mate 1 KURS 21 tania Number of event memories 4 09 DTC axe Figure 6 96 Self diagnosis Example of a tab name Functions that apply to the overall vehicle may have the following names Entire event memory VEH DTC Installation list VEH VBL Table 6 3 View names of vehicle self diagnosis The transport mode and access authorisation functions are not listed here since they are executed in a separate window and not on the Results tab To display and execute a function Control unit self diagnosis or Vehicle self diagnosis must be selected from the menu first and then the desired function name Every function can also be active once for each control unit If a tab 1s already open for a function for a control unit and the function is selected again the existing tab is displayed To restart the function explicitly the existing tab must be closed first by clicking on x If the function is not supported by the control unit a warning is displayed and you are not taken to the Results tab 120 Diagnostic mode Die Funktion Anpassung wird vom Steuerger t nicht untert
102. Customer codes Engine Engine operation dimensional accuracy Electric data transfer Power supply electrics Entire customer code Air conditioning Heating cooling functionality Diagnostic objects for selected customer codes Checking temperature sensor Deselect all Figure 6 63 Selecting the overall view This function corresponds to the Entire customer code function described above Close The dialogue box is closed in Overall view of customer code Main group Air conditioning Camponenttunction group Heating cooling Camponentfunction AC unit cooling capacity Componentfunction detail Position Group for type of complaint functionality Type of complaint uneven Boundary conditions sen boundary conditions Figure 6 64 Overall view of customer code The Overall view of customer code displays all code levels of the coding wizard with the available entries Close The overall view is closed After editing the DISS complaints the creation of the test plan can be completed 93 Diagnostic mode 6 3 2 1 Coding wizard The coding wizard is used as follows Information navigation Constraints Main group communication entertainment usage trigger Teleph d Componentfunction group elepnone mode Start call Componentifunction Initiate call start mailbox Componentifunction detail entry via MMI operations functionality without
103. DJOWO WLL WWII IY m an HOVTITO ITI IIVE DLL COC 264 a 9990 Virtual keyboard manual SIOIIIHDIAIHOITTI e III ISELIN JS TOCIIWOOWO CC O Sceuceeqtsesesecses EO R SBOOONNSDUEDDOM JAIVAS E eD CEE 265 a 9990 Chapter 11 Administration mode 11 1 Operation You can use Administration mode to configure various settings for Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Clicking on the Admin mode button makes the following view visible General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand design Details on Brand design Brand design Language Update Selection Volkswagen vi System logging Licence information Lamborghini System environment Bentley Global configuration GFF sequence Reset Figure 11 1 Administration window The administration view provides five tabs for system settings sorted by area These tabs are as follows e General System specific settings are configured here such as the language or update mode e Storage locations The storage locations of the system and work data are configured here e Support The support settings are configured here e Connections 266 Administration mode The connections to individual services of the Group systems are configured here e Verification The verification s configured here if this function has been licensed The setting options listed ar
104. Group system DISS 2 Connections Group system eShop 2 Connections mirror server 2 2 Verification configuration 2 Note The Verification tab is only available if Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service was purchased in a product version with external verification 268 Administration mode 11 2 General area 2 General brand design The graphical user interface of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service can be adapted to a special group brand in this area ener Save locations Suppor Connections verfcation Brand design Details about Brand design Brand design Language Update Selection Volkswagen x System logging System environment Lamborghini License information Bentley Global configuration GFF process Figure 11 2 Selecting the design The Selection list is used in Brand design details Designs of the following brands can be selected Volkswagen Audi Bentley Seat Skoda Lamborghini Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 269 Administration mode 2 General language To change the language of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service click on the Language pop up menu Support General Storage locations Conn
105. Licence information view Part 2 The following licence information is displayed e Product and brand variants 211 Administration mode The expiry date serial number and file path of the licence file e The country code under Information e The importer and dealer numbers and the dealer type under Licensed brand s e The hardware ID and the tester type under Hardware e The version of the start program under Launcher The data is only for your information Nothing can be changed Cy Reference See also Note in Diagnostic start up chapter 2 General global configuration With the global configuration all test devices testers notebooks access the same configuration file meaning that all the devices have the same settings General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand design Details on Global configuration Global configuration Language Global configuration directory Invalid directory Update a Global configuration directory Seema Use global configuration No v Licence information Modify global configuration System environment Global configuration GFF sequence Figure 11 11 Global configuration view For this the global configuration file must be saved in a previously selected path in the local network 278 Administration mode Select A path can be set here for the individual test devices under Global configuration d
106. MB to 5MB Backend mail transmission is implemented by the JavaMail standard software library If transmission errors occur in this software only the English original text can be displayed in error messages In this case reference to the original text of the error message is made There are exceptions 291 Administration mode If the mail server is not entered correctly login is displayed with error message ODS9102E with a reference to the unknown mail server ol Feedback mail server login Global user 1D Fasswiond Error There are 4 feedback is that you can now send ODS9II02E Infrastructure Feedback The configured mail server smtp i provider com is unknown Figure 11 20 Error message for incorrect mail server The user name and password can be re entered Apply User name and password are accepted Cancel Login is cancelled If a syntactically incorrect sender address is entered login appears with error message ODS9105E with a note on the invalid sender mail address a Feedback mail server login Global user 1D Fassword Error There are 4 feedback is that you can now send DSS31TD5E Infrastructure Feedback Error when generating e mail Invalid sender mail address absender adresse com found Figure 11 21 Error message for incorrect sender mail address The user name and password can be re entered Apply User name and password are accepted Cancel Login is cancelled 292 Admin
107. MO0907357A X014 H01 0 56 Radio coded gt communication faulty Event 62 Door Electronics Rear Left KWWP2000 TP20 1K0959703K O9XX 7 1 65 Tire Pressure Monitoring 1 KWVP2000 TP20 3C0959433AA 0420 051 0 Figure 6 153 View in the event of faulty communication with a control unit The installation list can be updated manually or in cycles For a single manual update use the now button If the user selects update in cycles the table is updated continuously according to the interval displayed in the text box under the option The value must be entered in seconds If the interval is shorter than the time required for the update reading is started again immediately after finishing a reading cycle The interval may be changed during the update in cycles The new value needs to be confirmed using the Return key To stop updates in cycles remove the tick from the in cycles option It is also possible to update the table immediately between two cycles by clicking on the now button 166 Chapter 7 Flash mode After the diagnosis Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service also provides the option of flashing The workflow in flash mode is very similar to the one in diagnostic mode but not as extensive Guided fault finding and the functions for the control units are not available here Flashing start up Ending flashing Using flashing Starting a flash session Ending a fl
108. Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service User Manual OFFBORRD om SirRrGNOSTIC Audi BS INFORMATION e SJSTEM SERVICE Confidential All rights reserved Circulation or duplication without prior written consent of the responsible de partment of Volkswagen AG is prohibited Contractual partners receive this document via the responsible pro curement department only VOLKSWAGEN AG Copyright 2007 VOLKSWAGEN AG Version 4 9 29 Table of Contents EUR ole so E E E E E A EEEE E NE 12 LI Noson Ihe annual 12 Stucture TEN 13 2 SYSE COMTE MENIS caved na de ea a a een 15 o ATON a en ee ee eu 16 a se oe oe ker beh yds 33 5 Application Start ser interface smd ee I a a 38 S 0 1771010 0 See nn EEE EEE ARE ne A ae ad ee 47 le TOUCHSCREEN res T ie a Seaee 47 5 1 2 Mouse and key boar en ee u Dee ei 47 6 Diashostie mode zarte ee na ee 48 Gl Diasnostie Worktlowees sa el 48 OCS 49 0 2 1 Start n s d a2n0818 asien esse aaa 50 6 2 2 Basic characteristics dialogue GMD pp 56 02 34 LOSIN 16 Group Syste ns un 60 6 24 Seleeuns an Oder a u ne E 61 62 5 Cont Ol Unit dent CAMON 68 71 73 0 79 8 2 0 Startne suided fault Andines GFF meo ee E A 83 6 3 Test pl n and Special FUNCHODS aan a a E E EREE 84 6 3 1 Start modules traversion tests test plan calculation pp 85 692 DISSA LEE se no ee E testament eas 86 032 1 COGS WA ea I De 94 692s Speclal ON 95 0 90 NS 107 642
109. Orders Pracess Control units Results 17 Dash Board KVWIP2000 TP20 3Cog20e71 X 1614 0073 oS OE a ye 00381 Instrument cluster data bus now 004 Mo signalicommunication i 00562 Oil level thermal sensor G266 au O10 Open circuitfshort circuit ta B 2 sec OO Fa Outside air temperature sensor G17 010 Open circuitfshort circuit ta E Time Y Type Name Value schen EC Ereignisspeicher Event code 00381 004 Priority 2 Frequency counter 2 Elimination counter f 0 Mileage 1 km Full Number of event memories 4 I7 DTC 4 Figure 6 120 KWP event memory The contents of the event memory are displayed in two tables arranged on top of each other The table at the top lists all events read out of the selected control unit It has four columns Event code The code number of the event SAE code The code number of the event in SAE format Event text The description of the event active Indicates whether the event is active or not If you click on an event line the table at the bottom lists the ambient conditions They represent additional information on the selected event such as mileage date fault status etc The number and type of these pieces of information may deviate partially from one control unit to another The table has two columns Type name The type of information Value The value read A may precede the designators That means that they represent a g
110. S than the ane connected Loading the diagnostic session willbe terminated as a precaution Figure 12 7 Error while loading a diagnostic session In the example shown above the VIN of the saved vehicle has changed compared to the vehicle currently con nected To load a diagnostic session login to the Group systems is activated Importer 123 Vehicle identification no WMWZZ2Z3CZ8E000085 Dealer 67890 Engine BKP Fu Order 1234 Welcome to the diagnostic program Objective comprehensive diagnostic functionality Data a After you have connected the vehicle and the started the diagnosis the vehicle will be identified and the event Current view memory will be evaluated Then the Guided Fault Finding and Guided Functions functions will be available for diagnosis If you would like to work without a warranty order you can also use self diagnosis Login Diagnostic log Global user ID bas Send Password t Save m Print E Copy ay Send ext Diagnostic session Hotfix er Connected to the vehicle Ignition switched on End diagnosis Extras Loading the diagnostic session has been started Figure 12 8 Login while loading a diagnostic session 309 Additional program functions If the data from the Group systems is to be used for a resumed session login is required Apply The login data entered global user ID and password is accepted and login performed Can
111. S 1_0807_11_SERVICE42 SG CODIEREN 11 Perform test Show documents Figure 6 66 Special functions view 95 Diagnostic mode This view has two columns The Tests column includes the test programs available for the vehicle The Status column indicates the status of each test program Reference See also chapter Using GFF Perform test The selected test program is executed To do this Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches to the Process tab Show documents The documents assigned to the vehicle are displayed To do this Offboard Diagnostic Infor mation System Service switches to Info mode 6 4 Using GFF The focus of the Using GFF section is on the execution of Guided Fault Finding GFF tests Testplan and special functions Diagnostic Start up Ending Diagnosis Executing Ending start modules GFF Executing the Executing GMD fraversion tests N Calculating the z Re Sysiems test plan Selecting an Adjusting the order test plan DISS TFI _ identificating control units Starting GFF Figure 6 67 Using GFF section After creating the test plan click on the enabled Test plan tab to switch to the list of test programs 96 Diagnostic mode Orders Test plan Process piss TP Control units Special functions Tests in current test plan Status Tests sorted by their potential success 2 amp Ignition key
112. See also chapter Diode test URDI e Continuity test URDI Test to check whether there is a connection of low resistance lt 2 ohm between two points gt Reference See also chapter Continuity test URDI Orunction block 2 All measuring functions and parameters of the current measurement are combined via connection DSO1 in func tion block 2 as well as various pressure sensors a temperature sensor or current measurement via the clamp on ammeter connection The buttons and the corresponding display of measured values are shown in green font The following measuring functions are available e Voltage DSO1 Measuring AC and DC voltage Reference See also chapter Voltage measurement DSO1 e Current clamp on ammeter Measuring direct and alternating current Reference See also chapter Current measurement clamp on ammeter e Pressure T P Measuring the pressure Reference See also chapter Pressure measurement T P 200 Test Instruments mode e Temperature T P Measuring the temperature gt Reference See also chapter Temperature measurement T P Onote The measuring functions Resistance URDI measuring range lt 1000hm Current URDI and Continuity test URDI have an automatic calibration option that is executed when the program is started for the first time In addition whether automatic calibration of a measuring lead is necessary depends on the device A system message may then ask you to carry out
113. Service 1 Diagnosis with guided fault finding is performed without an order In this case the self diagnosis functions for identified control units or control units entered as installed manually are available in the context menu of the block diagram or control unit list Reference See chapter Block diagram 2 If diagnostic start up is performed as quick start up without the using guided fault finding option Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service does not automatically identify the control units The control units are identified manually or entered as installed manually via the block diagram or the control unit list D Note P Guided Fault Findi l E E l _D Guided Faut Finding Subsequent start up of guided fault finding is possible using this button on the Control units tab That starts the automatic identification of the control units and guided fault finding 115 Diagnostic mode Orders Frocess Control units Networking diagram ran Fead all DTC memories Eee l uided Functions A i N 2 Transmission Control Module 3 Networking diagram Control module list DTG memory list Figure 6 90 Block diagram without control units read out You must left click for about 1 second or right click on the desired control unit in the block diagram or control unit list That opens the context menu i i Pr I ai it ri E LI 1 Read all
114. Subsystem ID KOM BIO Parameter name Current value Input K Nnumber K number 6 Option 1 No Option 2 No County version USA Brake pad wear indicator Yes Safety belt warning Yes Low windshield washer fluid level indic No Multi function display Yes Car outline depiction Version 1 17 COD p 4 Figure 6 119 UDS plain text code The table has five columns Parameter name The name of the parameter in the code string Current value The current code value 133 Diagnostic mode Input The user name entry There are three buttons below the table Apply Writes the modified code string into the control unit Restore Restores the code last used Binary code Switches to binary code representation To change the value of a parameter the user must click on the desired parameter row in the input column The new value can now be selected from a selection list For this type of code it is not necessary to enter a checksum since only the code values from data input and thus valid values can be selected Coding is started after clicking on the Apply button With the exception of checking the checksum the process is the same as for binary coding and is described there gt Reference See UDS binary code 6 6 2 3 Event memory The Event memory function reads the current contents of the event memory of a control unit It also provides the option of erasing the event memory 134 Diagnostic mode
115. Support ODSO0001E Sensor is not connected to logical port Please contact Support ODS0002E It is not permitted to execute in the current Please contact Support State ODSOO003E Object is in poor condition Please contact Support ODS0004E The configuration does not correspond to the Please contact Support connected device ODSOOOSE A fault has occurred in the display module of the Please contact Support oscilloscope ODSOOO6E No trigger channel has been set up for the trig Please contact Support gered measurement ODS0007E The GDI versions of the GDI components do not Please contact Support match ODS0008E A GDI error has occurred Please contact Support ODSOOOY9E An error has occurred in the GDI coordinator Please contact Support error code ODSO0010E An error has occurred in the GDI driver error Please contact Support ODS0011E There is a conflict with the DCD Please contact Support ODSO012E An error occurred during installation of the de Please contact Support vice driver ODSO0013E The measuring device is not configured in the Please contact Support GDI driver ODSOOI4E An error has occurred while parsing target Please contact Support curve ODSSOOIE No knowledge base is available for the selected Please check if there is an update for the soft ware or data Flash mode cannot be executed for this model If the error still applies
116. Tab bar for Admin mode General Storage locations Test instruments Suppor Connections Test instruments Action 2 Note The Actions and History tabs are not available to the unaffiliated market participant on the tab bar in Info mode The Verification tab is only available if Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service was purchased in a product version with external verification Modes and standard functions To switch modes click on the desired button in the Modes menu Modes Sy Test instruments ee Flashing Ve Diagnosis E Info Figure 5 6 Modes menu The following modes are available Flash mode E Flashing Test instruments mode y Test instruments Diagnostic mode NP Diagnosis 42 Application start user interface Info mode Admin mode The individual modes are described in the following chapters 2 Note It is only possible to switch from diagnostic mode to flash mode or vice versa if the current diagnostic session or flash session was exited first Reference See also Ending diagnosis See also Data diagnostic session The Standard functions menu contains functions that can always be accessed in Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service The following standard functions are available 5 Liata a4 Extras a Help Info Figure 5 7 Standard functions menus The following Data submenu can be used 43
117. The following error occurred during communi Please contact Support cation with the MCD system ODS8006F Diagnostic hardware could not be found Please Please check the connection to the vehicle and check whether the corresponding hardware is the diagnostic hardware or contact Support O connected correctly DS8007E The following error occurred during communi Please contact Support cation with the MCD system Error code Error code description ODS8008E The following error occurred during communi Please contact Support cation with the vehicle Error code Error code description ODS8009E No event memories could be read while commu Please contact Support nicating with the control unit Error description ODS8010E The operation was cancelled by the control unit Please contact Support Possible causes Login incorrect or missing Others ODS8011E Control unit with control address is not in Please contact Support stalled or does not respond ODS8012E An error occurred during communication with Please contact Support the vehicle The control unit s response contains implausible data ODS8013E An error occurred while filtering checking the Please contact Support flash sessions A possible cause could be incom patibility between ODX data input and flash da ta ODS8014E Diagnostic project is not available Please Please contact Support check the installati
118. U IVIIVWOVDWOVUE wt ee JIDUDOODODOOODODDODDO ssee IIIIIIIIUII UI CH CH EEE EB 10 2 3 18 Rumanian YIYABIYJYIG DIIVYIN I WUYI ago jj E CO 256 Virtual keyboard manual DOHHEHIILAIHAITI J WEED IA WI TV IN IWOIDA BI IVINV III AltGr A a 9990 U J nde VVL CE 10 2 3 19 Russian IDIIHIIDIIIIITT WOO II OWI OWTITTIOOWILD WII OWWOVOIIE I 2 cs 3 SIEHT Ne oOADDDODONGL CW jE DAAC ce 237 Virtual keyboard manual 10 2 3 20 Swedish noawoonDaoonaDC SEELE DogDcJ 3985 TDIITTIHITDIIIE I DLL Cc ga0OOnDDDODDODODC JIT III ITT WITH IWIWOOWOS DW OVON I JE OO OWI wt ee 2 JODO 680 IIIIIIII III DDL EB 10 2 3 21 Slovak JOVVZL JIM PJOJIYVI Vea ae agomDDoag IITZIIIITFDIJUIIE 258 Virtual keyboard manual IDOIIHIIDIIOHFITT ELLI NEL VBIODITDIKUITIT C O CI CB A a 9990 Te IU J HoT O o III TFITIE ED ED CED 10 2 3 22 Slovenian DOaawaonaooDanc le NET JID TDIIIHITSITIIIE I AltGr IIIEFTIIIIIEFIIIT ST an a WISIN IW IWOOOB 0 IVONWOOVE I a cs ee Ce 259 Virtual keyboard manual JIIITIIIITIII II HI a III UIIIIIEI 999 VVU DDL ED a 10 2 3 23 Spanish Esc Fi Fz F3 F4 F5 F Fr FS Fa F10 Flt riz f mer pl Blog pausa Pant f Despl DVOJA I ann nn neo JE 000000000000 amp IJLE _ Esc Fi F2 F3 F
119. a see reference below it is set by default The data can be overwritten in the Send support request dialogue If the overwritten data is to be reused for the next support request change it in the administration under Support area In addition to the sender data the brand of the diagnostic data used must be selected in the Manufacturer field if no diagnostic session is currently active Otherwise the field ls specified by default according to the vehicle brand Reference See Support area in the Administration mode chapter The Error classification section is for assigning the error to an area of the application 326 Additional program functions Error classification Hardware error O Software error Content error Incorrect translation Error cannot be classified clearly Figure 12 32 Feedback error classification Whether it is a hardware error software error a content related error a faulty translation or whether the error cannot be assigned to any of these areas is specified here Only one selection is possible The Priority section is for specifying how urgently the error needs to be rectified Priority For your information Order processing only possible to a limited extent Order processing not possible Figure 12 33 Feedback error priority Activate For your information if you are providing feedback in the form of comments or suggestions That is the default setting Activate Order
120. adn ed a dd dd Cat ld de 187 Ss Displaying the documents for atest 188 8 12 VIEW OF NCUACHONS Daran a eine T a 190 STR 191 192 SSC 11 001 da sta IE 193 SON See We ee Go ne iy tn a vt a an Eee te area 194 Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service User Manual ER 195 9 1 Test instruments user interlace MD GE 196 7 2 Stuelure Ofthe Multimeter Client area yet ee 198 9 3 Structure of the operating area of the multimeter client area nn 199 9 4 Test parameter buttons 1 FUNCTION Block Tr an tan sehaduatwneuerds a 201 9 5 Client area for activated Voltage URDI voltage measurement pp 204 9 6 Client area for activated Current URDI current measurement pp 205 9 7 Client area for activated Resistance URDI resistance measurement pp 206 99 Chon area tor act vated Diode URDI na a en natin vere esuiseriwaeareeasiererasns 207 9 9 Client area for activated Continuity test URDI ana ne a a R nE 208 9 10 Client area for activated DSO1 voltage measurement pp 209 9 11 Client area for activated Current clamp on ammeter current measurement pp 210 9 12 Client area for activated Pressure T P pressure measurement pp 211 9 13 Client area for activated Temperature T P temperature measurement pp 212 LA Structure or the Oscilloscope chent area ne ae 213 2 154 Oscilloscope USD ne ne dn db nd 214 9 10 Parametl1sallon OL channel A 2 a a ndd wee Metadata pera tear ed an eea aera 217 vette the MICASUTING Moder
121. al via Offboard Diag nostic Information System Service is not possible Without automatic renewal the licence that will expire must be re ordered via eShop 2 Connections mirror server 2 Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service obtains files for updates and external verification from mirror server 2 J General Storage locations Test instruments Test instruments Action Support Connections Brand settings Details on Mirror server 2 Group system GFF Group system ElsaPro Mirror server URL http 10 33 198 18idav MR Group system eShop Mirror server user Group system Carport Mirror server password Group system DISS Figure 11 28 Mirror server 2 view The address of the local mirror server is entered in the Mirror server URL field that was configured locally for the workshop Entries only need to be made in the Mirror server user and Mirror server password fields if the local mirror server was configured during login The local administrator provides this information 300 Administration mode Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 11 6 Verification area 2 Verification configuration This setting is used to configure the additional external verification function This
122. ally login to the Group systems during diagnostic start up is successful If not or if the online connection was interrupted the following error message is displayed Ss Login Global user O Password Error ODS9212E Infrastructure Wu online connection Dealer portal Login not possible No access to the dealer portal Apply Cancel Figure 6 23 Login to Group systems not possible 63 Diagnostic mode It is possible to repeat login and correct the login data if necessary Apply Login is repeated Cancel Login is cancelled As a result no data from the Group systems is available such as orders from ElsaPro D Note U The button can be used to reload order data from ElsaPro Authorised dealers can also log on to the Group systems here This button is available in all views of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service that obtain data from Group systems Cy Reference See Info mode chapter If there is a connection to the Group systems Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service lists the orders available in ElsaPro Orders Control units Order selection for vehicle WYW2221IZ3W376491 Order Registration Date 0004 2008 08 29 0815 2008 08 29 1234 2008 08 29 Text Inspektion inkl w m Mob Garantie Lenkrad aus u einbauen Inspektion inkl w m Mob Garantie Lenkrad aus u einbauen Inspektion inkl w m Mob Garantie Lenkrad aus u einbauen Standard job for worki
123. alspe zu amp 2 Massepunkt neben Lenks ule 49 Antiblockiersystem ABS mit elektronischer Differentialspt m 4 _ i Massepunkt an der Lenks ule Automatisch abblendbarer Innenspiegel Regensensor at os i gt J i IN Masseverbindung 1 im v Figure 8 15 Circuit diagrams view The diagrams are displayed in a tree structure in the left hand window Click on the required circuit diagram to display it in the window on the right Scroll forward a page Scroll back a page You can use this button to reload content Authorised dealers can log on to the Group systems here again 8 6 Vehicle tab The Vehicle tab displays all relevant vehicle details Prerequisite is that diagnostic start up has been performed The individual details displayed are as follows 2 Vehicle identification number 2 Manufacturer 2 Type 2 Model year 2 Production site 193 2 Serial number 2 Engine code 2 Gearbox code 2 Sales number 2 Sales description 2 Production date Info mode Documents Campaigns History Wiring diagrams Mana Vehicle PR no VIN ANANZZZIJZIWV376491 Brand Y Manufacturer VOLKSWAGEN PKW Model year 2003 Type 1J Engine code ALH Model year 2003 Transmission code EGR Production location VOLKSWAGEN AG WOLFSBURG Sales number 145014 Serial number 376491 Sales code Production date GOLF VAR TDIBASIS 66 5 G 2002 12 03 Figure 8 1
124. ancel Figure 4 3 Displaying available updates Back Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater goes back a step Next An available program update is automatically installed At this point please follow the instructions 34 Update Cancel Installation of the update is cancelled Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is then started in the current version If no update data is available Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service informs you of this with the following message Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater Update Software Update No updates are available Maximum download size unknown Download times DSL 1024k unknown DSL 612k unknown ISDN 64k unknown Modem 56K unknown Previous Figure 4 4 No updates available Back Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater goes back a step Next The Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Updater is closed Cancel Installation of the update is cancelled Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is then started in the current version If update data is available there are updates for the following areas 1 Individual program components of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service if they have been li censed 2 Data processed by Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service such as diagnostic data test programs and similar 3 Programs provided by third parties such as MCD server or virtual ke
125. annot be determined automatically or if a vehicle specific characteristic is to be specified a message is displayed with an appropriate selection If several variants of individual control units are available in the context of the traversion tests a dialogue for selecting variants appears Control unit Variant 37 Navigation Radio navigation system RNS 510 42 Door Electronics Driver Side 46 Central Module Comfort System 52 Door Electronics Passenger Side 55 Headlight Regulation 56 Radio 77 Tel eph one PAER SRI arene Psa ere ere rae TPO TRE RER Radio R100 Radio RCD210 Radio RCD300 Radio RCD300 mp3 Figure 6 52 Variant selection view To select a control unit variant click in the Variant field next to the corresponding control unit A button appears that can be used to open the menu for selecting the variants Set variant The selected control unit variants are applied After setting the control unit variants the creation of the test plan starts The automatic compilation of the test plan and the order of the test programs depend on the event memory entries read out of the control units the Technical Product Information TPI and on customer findings during dialogue 85 Diagnostic mode reception available in coded form These coded customer live statements are made up of fault objects e g com ponents fault types e g rattling and boundary conditions e g temperature The test programs in the test plan
126. are described in detail in the Self diagnosis chapter of this manual Reference See also chapter Self diagnosis 78 Diagnostic mode 6 2 5 3 Event memory The event memory view can be used to view event memories available for all control units This list only contains control units w th an event memory entry Control Orders piss Test plan Process Special functions Event memory Telephone 5N0035730 2410 Telefon 5N0035730 011 Gateway Diagnostic interface for databus 1KO907530L 0052 J533 Gateway HO 1K0907951 HO Block diagram Control unit list Event memory ist Figure 6 43 View of the event memory entries Click on the Event memory list tab on the Control units tab to list the control units with event memory entries At first the entries are closed and the list displays the control units 79 Diagnostic mode contro units Orders piss Test plan Process Special functions Event memory Telephone 5N0035730 2410 Telefon 5N0035730 011 Gateway Diagnostic interface for databus 1KO907530L 0052 J533 Gateway HO 1K0907951 HO 3 1300 4 Control module for navigation with CD mechanism J401 No signal communication Intermittent 3 Standard environmental conditions Status 52 Date 14 06 41 00 00 2000 Mileage 3 km Priority 2 Frequency counter 2 Unlearning counter driving cycle 42 1304 4 Radio No signalicommunication Intermit
127. ash session Identificating Selecting an order idantificating control units Figure 7 1 Workflow in flash mode e During flash start up the vehicle is connected to the test device and identified login to the Group systems is performed an order is selected for the session and the control units are identified e Then the flash programs determined for the vehicle can be executed e If the desired flash programs have been completed the flash session can be ended 167 Flash mode 7 1 Starting flashing In the Start flashing section the vehicle is connected to the test device and flash start up takes place Flashing selecting an order Identificating Identificating Control units a vehice Figure 7 2 Start flashing section Flashi After selecting the mode with the same name flashing is available Connecting the vehicle is described in detail in the Starting diagnosis chapter gt Reference For more details on vehicle identification see the Starting diagnosis chapter 2 Note For legal reasons not every diagnostic connection can be used for flashing e g radio connections If a diagnostic connection is used for flashing that is not permitted Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service will display an appropriate warning and request that you use a connection with legal approval Achtung 2 Die Nutzung der Betriebsart Flashen
128. assigned it as a manual TPI to the marked complaint The Apply button is only enabled for new TPI numbers All manually entered TPI are listed in the dropdown list Extend test plan If the Extend test plan button is pressed for a marked complaint on the DISS tab or on the TPI tab the Transfer diagnostic objects to test plan dialogue appears Transfer diagnostic objects to test plan Customer codes Engine gt Engine operation dimensional accuracy Electrical power electric system data transfer Power supply gt electrics Air conditioning Heating cooling functionality Diagnostic objects for selected customer codes Battery A Checking temperature sensor Select all Deselect all Transfer to test plan Figure 6 61 Transferring a diagnostic object to the test plan This dialogue lists all complete customer codes including manual ones that belong to the current order The customer codes and their TPI from DISS are displayed in the top half of the dialogue The diagnostic objects of the selected TPI are displayed in the bottom half if available The customer code TPI called using the Extend test plan function is selected automatically The diagnostic objects of this selected customer code TPI are also displayed automatically The diagnostic objects can either be selected or deselected individually by clicking on the tick in the left hand column or all in one go Select all All diagnost
129. at test drive mode IS active asked 318 12 22 Se 319 12 23 Confirmation that test drive mode has been cancelled 0 nn ei aa aaa 319 12 24 Contimation that test drive mode has been end en eo i ae Auden 319 321 12 26 Conte xtc lated 322 323 12 28 Nav gation in the onune Del se a a en ea a a 324 1229 Nav salon bar oF ne Online Delp ed a ei nd dn te he dn ln da EES 324 12250 The Send support request WINdOW so acces So E oe ne ee en a 325 12731 Information omic ledDaek Send er nt er de ei an 320 12 325 Feedback Cit Or las tle al 01 pp pe A 321 23x Feedback CHOP 327 321 12735 Mail server Oe Il for Tee Eee 328 12 36 Inconect mallsewer los ee Beeren kein 328 12 37 Peedb ck miessage with SEINE COMNeCHON se 3a ee i a i AAEE 329 12 38 Window Wilh warinss 10E part Nr ua 330 12395 Window With warmina notes Palit 2 see ne Bea Tine ae 331 12 40 Window with Ww arnines NOles Pat I Rain 332 333 335 14 2 Windows fire wall mos eae te dT er IR en Te 348 1 3 Browser Securty DES Lo ee a m a a 349 List of Tables 6 1 Meaning of the SCP status numbers pp 03 6 2 View names of control unit Se HasnosB anstehen eee 119 6 3 View names of vehicle self diagnosis anna Le ida 120 64 Table Or keyboard shorteuls ses ee ee 158 7 1 Meaning of the SCP status numbers pp 175 9 1 Setting thertime base se Balearen uch 216 9 2 Maximum measuring time during long term measurement on 224 93 Colour OF
130. at the GMD for flash start up is less detailed It is possible to switch between manual and automatic vehicle identification 171 Flash mode Basic vehicle characteristics Vehicle identification automatic manual Model 5M Golf Plus 2005 gt Model year 2006 6 Per ain aia ah Ulva ana GPa in era Gish hn Ob Gra ure her ar ee eR ee Scr at cd ae ac aaa aai aaa a Eea e a S Figure 7 7 Automatic vehicle identification For example the VIN can be entered manually and subsequent identification performed automatically 1f possible During automatic vehicle identification the basic characteristics on a grey background cannot be changed any more Apply Flash start up is continued Cancel Vehicle identification is cancelled Vehicle identification is thus completed 7 3 Login to the Group systems Login to the Group systems takes place in the next flash start up section Flashing Start up Identificating control units Identificating Starting a j flash session a vehicle Figure 7 8 Login to Group systems section To login Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens a login window 172 Flash mode we Login Global user ID Password Apply Cancel Figure 7 9 Login window to the Group systems Login takes place once per session The global user ID and the password for access
131. ation is started 360
132. ave your changes click on the Save button 2 Note A storage location must be available to be able to save the session data 284 Administration mode 2 Storage locations flash paths The file paths are specified in this area used by Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service to load flash files N Storage locations Support Connections General Test instruments Test instruments Action Database Details on Flash paths Flash paths Diagnostic session Path 2 hard drive Invalid directory Flash paths x Path 1 CD ROM E datflash Select i x Diagnastie log Path 2 hard drive C Program Files Offboard_Diagnostic_Information_System_Service lash Figure 11 16 Flash paths view Select In Flash path details under Flash paths this button is used to specify the path to the flash files in the Windows file system for Path 1 CDROM and Path 2 hard drive Local flash files can be stored under these paths and made available for flashing Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button The manual entry of the paths must comply with Windows specifications CDROM drive letter Flash data or 285 Administration mode Drive letter Folder name Flash data 2 Note I
133. ay of the control units pp 75 Buttons Tor the Individual conttol units essen ri 75 Context menu control UNE DUNONG sen a ee Od ee ee Seaweed one 76 Enters a ontrol unit a stalled anne ri nn er ar ei ie 76 Control units entered manually as installed displayed in italics pp FI Seleer varanmt Uae em ay Selectine a guided function 01 2 0010 Une 78 VIEW Ol Ne eveornt INEMOLS CHIFICS ean need tess eu ties ate tale ata a Soin Race eat ine ate ad db a tee thes a 79 Openme an event Memory en een ini 80 VE 80 SONS The event GO 81 Context menu In tie Cvent monmor VIEW cic seers screws ee en ta E 82 St GEE SCCUOM re een Ei nes a E Reese ee 83 Starting Guided Tult TMCS street 83 Vest plan anid Special PUNCUONS SOON 84 Start modules traversion tests test plan calculation section pp 85 ED 85 TS ES 86 DISS tab view after dias nostic Star WDR 87 Table wiih DISS on ahi aussen len tee erinnern 87 Codine Wad oon DOK ee ea a E 88 ET 89 Wie W Or thier TPT Gb som ep ee u a 90 Displayine a sclected T P r number st ae ae a ne a a ein 90 91 Transferring acdiagnosiic Object to the test Plan au es kan ides 91 Deselected lt ustomer ode un ae ee 92 Selectine he Overall VIEW roa a ee eine ala instant 93 Overall view Of eCustomer CO pn ep a a E A E E 93 COGN Wizard esse i a nd a a 94 Special TUMCUONS Views a vase ales een a ubes ty nadniogiess 95 sine GEF SECON neuere ones a et 96 Test plan view essen ea releases 97 A
134. be plausible for manual identification of the vehicle to be continued Otherwise there are no restrictions and dependencies in terms of the selection of the vehicle characteristics provided 2 Note If a plausible but technically incorrect VIN is entered Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service might not provide purposeful tests for GFF due to missing requirements The manual input of the VIN should therefore be performed carefully In automatic mode it is no longer possible to change the vehicle identification number and the clearly determined basic characteristics Diagnostic mode Vehicle identification is continued after determining the VIN There are several pop up menus in the Basic vehicle characteristics dialogue that allow you to choose from several proposals if available Manufacturer Not translated Volkswagen Select the vehicle manufacturer in the Manufacturer pop up menu Model 3B Fassat 1997 gt The models for the manufacturer selected above are now shown in the Model pop up menu Model year 2005 5 v After you have selected the model select the model year for the selected vehicle in the Model year pop up menu Variant Sedan v Once the model year has been selected specify the model type in the Model type pop up menu e g saloon estate etc Engine AKN 2 5 LTDL 110k K AKN 25 LTD 110k ALT 2 0 L Motronic 96k ALZ 1 6L Simos aka AMA 2 3 L Motronic 1 42kvy AVE
135. board can be opened without graphical user interface The parameters supported are listed in Table 10 1 Installation parameters VERYSILENT Suppresses the graphical user interface DIR directory The directory to which the virtual keyboard is to be installed UNINSTALL Uninstallation of the virtual keyboard Table 10 1 Installation parameters Table 10 2 Installer return values includes the return values of the installer No administrator rights There is not sufficient memory capacity on the drive Table 10 2 Installer return values During the installation process a system service will be installed that starts the virtual keyboard This service also monitors whether the virtual keyboard is running If it is terminated by an application the service restarts the virtual keyboard 10 2 Software The virtual keyboard runs on Windows XP with Service Pack 2 installed It emulates a normal keyboard con nected via USB or PS 2 The virtual keyboard program sends keyboard events to the active application in the same way as by a real keyboard The virtual keyboard starts as soon as the login screen appears The keyboard can be displayed or hidden via an icon on the title bar see Figure 10 1 Title bar icon of the active application 151 xi Figure 10 1 Title bar icon 10 2 1 User interface If Virtual keyboard is displayed the keyboard is always visible It is transparent allowing ap
136. c Information System Service administration rights are required for the operating system on the tester or laptop You have two installation options The first option is online installation 2 Open the e mail you received from eShop 2 Save the licence certificate from the e mail to a directory of your choice 2 To access the corresponding installation file setup exe on mirror server 2 click on the URL in the e mail make sure that you click on the version you ordered 2 Now save setup exe to a directory of your choice 2 DVD To start the installation w zard double click on the stored setup exe file The second option is offline installation 2 Save the licence certificate received via e mail to a directory of your choice 2 Insert the DVD with the installation data in the drive 2 After the DVD starts select the version you ordered 2 To start the installation wizard click on the appropriate setup exe file 2 Note During offline installation it is important that you install the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service version that corresponds to the order If setup exe of a different version is installed it will not be possible to start the application since the licence will not correspond The installation wizard starts Installation Installdj Assistent Bok OFfboard Diagnostic Information System Service bereiket den Installtj Assistenten vor der Sie bei der Installation unterst tzt
137. ccessful a dialogue appears with an error message that needs to be confirmed by the user Depending on the type of error that occurred the messages may differ e g stating that communication with the vehicle could not be established After rectifying the problem the process of configuring the default settings can be repeated gt Reference See also Error messages chapter 145 Diagnostic mode 6 6 2 5 Identification The self diagnosis function Identification is for reading various permanent values out of the control unit such as part number software version etc These values can only be displayed they cannot be modified Orders Results Control units Frocess O39 Central Electrics KVVP2000 TP20 3C0gs 049AE 2000 HST System ID Partnumber Software version Workshop code el _Bordnetz SG H51 SCO083 PO49AE 2000 i Wischer 110506 002 en 319554194 0205 Attribute Value o VA part number SCO093 FO49A E System name Bordnetz s 3 HSI1 Code lt value Unavailable gt Workshop code hex value Unavailable gt Software version 2000 Hardware part number SCO093 FO49A E 09 ID ax Figure 6 129 Results window of self diagnosis identification In this example the control unit for the central electrics has been selected and identification has been performed The table at the top has four columns containing information read out of the control unit System identifica
138. cel Login to the Group systems is cancelled No Group system information is available during the loaded session Cy Reference See also chapter Data 12 1 4 Hotfix Hotfix Get If you click on this button it is possible to download a hotfix or workshop data patch A hotfix is provided individually to a dealer or a workshop in a special folder on mirror server 2 Typical hotfix data is diagnostic data or GFF test programs adapted specially for the dealer Active hotfixes may be overwritten by newer ones After activating the Get button Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service searches for the workshop patch under the mirror server 2 address If it is available the user 1s asked whether the patch is to be installed With a positive confirmation the patch is installed Otherwise the installation can also be cancelled If the connection to mirror server 2 could not be established or if no data is found there a corresponding message is displayed Delet If you click on this button it is possible to delete an installed hotfix or workshop data patch Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service asks the user if the workshop patch is really to be deleted With a positive confirmation the patch is deleted Otherwise you can also cancel the deletion here B Note The date of the hotfix update is not saved 310 Additional program functions 12 2 Extras The following functions are available in the Extras
139. chapter Measured value selection Control units Results Orders Process 17 Dash Board UDS ISOTP sCog20s726 0206 01 EV_Kombi_UDS_VOD_RMOS A04040 Default settings for UDS Select measured values overall bd pe 0000 le Selection IDE04848 Volume to be replenished i IDEUSS82 _Status of textlacoaustics 5 IDES0005 Analysis 5 DE00729 _Status of rear safety belt 3rd row gt DE00728 _Status of rear safety belt 2nd row OEOO FOO ESI Max oil level in service interval OEOQDBSS ESI Min oil level in service interval IBEOO69S _ES Service interval exceeded in da IDEO2491 _ Status input signals high beam assis OEO2499 _ Status comfort 1 Bi gt lt gt 17 BAS 8 Figure 6 126 UDS default setting Measured value selection This view can be used to select measured values for every default setting displayed during the process In addition global measured values can also be selected 1 e measured values that apply to all default settings 142 Diagnostic mode Segment test v Segment test Figure 6 127 Selecting the default setting The pop up menu at the top lists all previously selected default settings The first entry is always overall The measured values are assigned to this entry that do not apply to a specific default setting but to the entire control unit The available measured values are displayed for
140. ck the connection to Preparation steps In the following DTC memories will be checked regarding the malfunctionCentral control module for convenience system Preallocation control modules m No communication Freallocation control modules Test requirements Preallocation for evaluating the FSP The fuses via which control module is secured terminal 15 and terminal 30 are OK Preallocation for evaluating the FSP Selection model Connector names for GolffRabbit Ge End modules Funktionsbeschreibung Evaluating DTC memory lt gt gt gt Heli Cancel test Figure 6 76 Function descriptions in the test program The document is selected using the corresponding button such as Function description The name of the docu ment and thus the button caption depend on the test program To display the corresponding document click on the Function description button These are only documents integrated in the test programs Local and global documents may be assigned to a test program Local documents apply to individual test steps and global documents apply to the entire test program 104 Diagnostic mode 1 sicherungsbelegung 2 Sicherungsbelegung steckeransicht 2 Steckeransicht 3 Steckeransicht 1 sicherungsbelegung 4 Sicherungsbelegung Figure 6 77 Local and global documents in the test program If several local and global documents are integrated in a test program all local documents are combined i
141. could not be identified automat ically it is displayed in italics in the control unit list and in the block diagram 76 Diagnostic mode 18 0 Airbag Airbag 1KO9096054B 8000 58 AIRBAG WWSR 034 25 0 Immobilizer Immobilizer 1KO920874M 1220 IMMO VDD 55 0 Headlight Regulation 1 T0907357 0003 Dynamische LWR 85 g fire Pressure Monitoring f 16 0 Steering Column Electronics Steering column electronics 1KO953549BD 0070 J0527 036 38 g Seat Adjustment Driver Side 46 0 Central Module Comfort System 1K0959433BT 0204 KSG PQ35 G2 020 Figure 6 40 Control units entered manually as installed displayed in italics The Select variant button enables a variant of the control unit to be selected if several control variants exist All possible variants of the control unit are shown The variant can be changed any number of times Select Variant x Select variant Ar Conditioning ee nennen ee e eem nennen er rer er eee 1 _Climatic Climatronic Figure 6 41 Select variant dialogue Select After the control unit variant has been selected and confirmed by clicking on this button the control unit list the event memory and the test plan are updated automatically Close To close the dialogue without selecting a variant click on this button The variant selection is only available for control units already identified or entered manually Reference See also Guided fault
142. ct ane es Tne te plan een ee la ed AAU 98 Test View On the Process ba a kun 99 Message and instruction window during the test une aa a a a 100 Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service User Manual 0 72 Sep SEQUENCE dunne theilest nasser 101 6 75 Buttons tor Sclecuns Alternativestest Steps an nee nee ee a eriteie 102 6 74 Displayinsiiheselesieditest step a His 102 6 79 Decision Du Hons In The lest Pror rani Aare usa le users 103 6 76 F niction desenptons in The Test Prosta trresna n Based a neve a a E 104 6 77 Local and clobal documents im the t st program an voter i a I E 105 6 70 EX ne COCUIME EL YI Wn sa oa dt a a 106 6 79 Verl ICaHONn Node Query oe er no a ed ea 107 6 80 Window Tor Sseleiins Tess ma miele 108 8 81 End 1d nosis EGG 109 Oo Endins ia NOSIS re ea A i A 110 8 83 Endins faule Indins le a ed ta a dd E a 110 St BEra na tne Vent nonmon ee da cna en de eds 111 6 95 Eras ine TIe eyen MEMO ee ee do tte lace ee lerne 111 6 86 Executine The Prostam Tor ie readiness Codes eines 112 6 87 SONG IA CNOSUC ED 113 6 88 Print diasnoSte OCT 113 6 89 2SUPPOrL TeqUest zuerst 114 6 90 Block diagram without control units read U a ee a ee 116 6091 Minua identican of COMMOLUNIUS em ei u I u 116 6 92 Entering a control unit as installed that has not been identified pp 117 6 932 StarunS sell d1asn0S18 near ie erlernen eier tie 118 6 94 Selection window for control unit self diagnosis pp 118 6
143. ction window with self diagnosis functions for the overall vehicle 118 Diagnostic mode Self diagnosis functions Vehicle Transport mode Installation list Figure 6 95 Selection window for vehicle self diagnosis Execute The selected function is executed To do this Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches to the Results tab with the exception of the Transport mode function Cancel No function is executed and the window is closed Here you can choose between the functions Event memories for entire system Transport mode and In stallation list The functions are executed and the results displayed on the Results tab For each control unit every function has its own subordinate tab These tabs have different designations for the individual functions For control unit specific self diagnosis functions the designations are as follows Adaptation KAL Code COD Event memory ESP Default setting BAS Identification Measured values Actuator diagnosis Table 6 2 View names of control unit self diagnosis With these functions in addition to the view name the address is displayed on the tab of the corresponding control unit DO Example The tab for the Event memory function of the central electrics with the address 09 has the name 09 ESP 119 Diagnostic mode Process 09 Central Electrics KVWP2000 TP20 sCogs 049AF F2000 H51
144. current hour of the day in 24 h format e Yomm for the current minute of the hour e ss for the current second of the minute e VIN Vehicle Identification Number chassis number of the diagnosed vehicle e Freely definable text that may include the following characters e Letters in upper and lower case e All digits from 0 9 e And the following characters _ underline minus dot Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button ap Note To avoid confusion with other files the diagnostic protocol is saved in the default settings with the VIN in the file name 287 Administration mode 11 4 Support area 2 Support contact data The data of the person available to support as the contact s entered here Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action General Storage locations Contact data Details on Contact data Contact data for enquiries Outgoing mail server First name Surname E mail address Telephone number Automat positive feedback On vj Figure 11 18 Support view The contact and his address data for support enquiries is entered in Contact details under Contact data for enquiries Possible data e First name e Surname e E mail address Teleph
145. cute Executes the selected function Done Closes the dialogue Cancel Cancels the changing of transport mode To switch transport mode on or off the corresponding list entry needs to be selected and confirmed by clicking on the Execute button The result of the function successful not successful is displayed in the information area above the list Status of switching transport mode on or off Gi Transport mode has been successfully switched on or off Figure 6 150 Success message after changing transport mode In the event of an error a new message appears with detailed information on the error gt Reference See also chapter Error messages 163 Diagnostic mode W Switch transport mode on or off Status of switching transport mode on or off Transport mode could not be switched on or off Select function Switch off transport mode Execute Done Cancel Figure 6 151 Transport mode Depending on the type of error that occurred an additional message may be displayed with details e g that the vehicle could not be connected After eliminating the problem a new attempt can be made to change transport mode 164 Diagnostic mode 6 6 3 3 Installation list The actual installation coded in the vehicle is displayed in the installation list In addition the number of events that occurred for each control unit is displayed if available Control units Results Orders Froc
146. d diagnostic interface Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 Oleg Diagnostic interface AT Select the diagnostic interface to be activated Diagnostic interface Notebook PC With radio head Vas 5054 Notebook Pc with radio head YAS 5054 NotebooklP with wa5 5055 Drew Technologies Inc Carb 4Q Plus I ME ACTIA GmbH PassThru 5 Blue Streak Electronics Inc BSE 2534 Global Programmer Flash Dearborn Group Technology Inc WSI 2434 lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 3 8 Selecting the diagnostic interface 21 Installation Back Go back in the installation process one step Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is continued Cancel The installation is terminated 2 Note Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service has been prepared for the use of PassThru boxes The following models can be used with Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service without restrictions e Blue Streak Electronics Inc iflash Global Programmer e Dearborn Group VSI 2534 e Drew Technologies CarDAQ Plus e I ME Actia GmbH PassThru XS The PassThru boxes listed have already been configured as diagnostic interfaces in Offboard Diagnostic Infor mation System For start up you only need to connect the respective box to the diagnostic tester via USB port and install the corresponding software package from the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service
147. d parameter De pending on the type of parameter the new value may be selected from a list or entered as desired Unit The unit of the adaptation value 124 Diagnostic mode Every adaptation function has parameters By default they are displayed in closed form they can be displayed by double clicking in the row or by clicking on in front of the function s name Another double click or a click on closes the parameter list again To open the parameters of all functions in one go click on the button on the right below the table In the same way clicking on closes all open parameter lists again Depending on the number of available functions opening may take a while Note When you close one or more parameter lists all values that have not yet been saved are lost The user ls informed about this by a message Input parameters become lost Closing the node causes input parameters that have not been written to become lost Figure 6 102 Warning on closing the parameter list Yes The values entered are discarded and the parameter list 1s closed No The parameter list remains open and the values entered are retained There are three buttons below the table Restore Restores the values of the selected adaptation function saved to the control unit before the last write operation Clicking on the button displays the values last used in the Input column To write the restored values
148. ded in the target installation list ou can Update the target installation list here Control unit Encoding status el 02 Transmission Control Module not encoded x TH 15 Alrbad not encoded A 44 Steering Assistance encoded v 52 Door Electronics Passenger Side encoded v 08 Alr Conditioning encoded v lf Dash Board encoded v mil Figure 6 29 Check installation list dialogue The installation status is indicated by these symbols The target installation displayed corresponds to the actual installation 68 Diagnostic mode Kl T The target installation displayed corresponds to the actual installation The target installation has been changed and not coded yet The target installation displayed does not correspond to the actual installation The target installation displayed does not correspond to the actual installation The target installation has been changed and not coded yet Close The window is closed The installation status can be edited via the coding status The system detected control units that are not included in the target installation list You can update the target installation list here Control unit Encoding status kl 08 Air Conditioning encoded v 17 Dash Board encoded ww 0z Erakes 1 encoded w 42 Door Electronics Driver Side not encoded er not encoded 56 Radio v v 16 Steering Column Electronics not encoded
149. der s specifications need to be entered The provider provides the necessary data such as mail server address SMTP port and security settings For login the login name must be used for the mailbox and the password that was assigned If there is a separate network with its own mail server it must be configured forSMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol An old mail server which does not support this protocol e g older versions of Microsoft Exchange cannot be used The administrator of the mail server provides the necessary data for the configuration of the outgoing mail server gt Reference See also Support chapter 2 Note The configuration entries for the mail server must be entered precisely according to the specifications Free text such as mail server information and mail transfer address is not checked Faulty entries will cause feedback transmission errors The outgoing mail server does not support the use of a proxy server for access to the internet If security software is used such as a firewall or anti virus protection make sure that it doesn t block the mail server or the ports used The size limit set on the mail server for e mails must be observed Your provider or mail server administrator can give you the required information The size limit might need to be adjusted 1f this is possible If a feedback mail exceeds this size limit it will not be sent Feedback mails with attached files may have a size of 2
150. des all or some events displayed before the erasure the control unit did not accept the command for erasing or the corresponding event was immediately re entered since the cause of the error has not been eliminated yet Event memory entries that have been deleted CANNOT be restored 136 Diagnostic mode Control Units Results Orders Fracess 17 Dash Board UDS ISOTP Fslog20s 2b F 02067 X01 EV KombilUDs VDOD_RMOs 404040 Event code SAE code Event text active ja Refresh SOSET2 Fuel Level Sensor 1 Resistance too great Now 9453074 BIOSETB x Llin cycles SOSFIZ Outside temperature sensor Resistance too high 9453320 BIOSFIE x 1 2 sec Be Type Name Value Name Value Ey Sart 5 EC Bit 0 test faulty Active Dat Event code 303E12 94530 Bit 1 current operating cy Passive Zen DTG memar Priority 2 Bit 2 current or last monit Passive Malfunction frequenc 1 Bit 3 qualified Yes Unlearning counter 255 Bit 4 tested since DTG m No Odometer reading 1048575 Bit 5 malfunction occurre Passive Date 31 83 53 31 15 Bit amp test performed No Bit warning active No Number of exent memories 4 17 DTO amp Figure 6 122 UDS event memory For UDS control units in addition to the ambient conditions to the right of the table another table is displayed with information on the event status Name The name of the status bit Value The value of the sta
151. diagnostic protocol If errors occurred during the program sequence the support request may also be edited and your own comments and screenshots added Add notes The feedback dialogue is opened for further editing This button is only available on ending the diagnostic session if Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service detected any errors during the program sequence A precise description of the support request is available in the Feedback chapter Reference See also chapter Feedback The diagnostic session is thus finished Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is in the start view of diagnostic mode 114 Diagnostic mode 6 6 Self diagnosis The following chapters describe under which circumstances self diagnosis functions of the control units are avail able in addition to guided fault finding how the self diagnosis functions are called and what the individual func tions can do Self diagnosis gives the user the option of accessing individual diagnostic functions of the control unit or vehicle Self diagnosis is generally used if e No GFF is available for the vehicle very old or very new vehicle model e No GFF is available for the problematic case e GFF refers to the self diagnosis Unlike with GFF the interpretation of the results must be performed by the user 6 6 1 Self diagnosis in general There are two ways to execute self diagnosis functions in Offboard Diagnostic Information System
152. dialogue appears Batterie nicht angeschlossen Bitte berpr fen Sie vor dem Fortfahren ob die Batterie angeschlossen ist und die Spannung mindestens 12 V betragt Figure 6 7 No vehicle connected If no vehicle is connected the No vehicle connected dialogue appears 53 Diagnostic mode Kein Fahrzeug angeschlossen Bitte berpr fen Sie vor dem Forfahren ob der Diagnosestecker korrekt mit dem Fahrzeug verbunden ist Continue Cancel Figure 6 8 No vehicle connected Repeat The vehicle connection is re checked Continue The system resumes diagnostic start up Cancel Diagnostic start up is cancelled If a vehicle is connected the ignition status is checked without another message being displayed If it is still not possible to identify the vehicle despite correct diagnostic plug connection the Vehicle identification not possible dialogue appears Vehicle identification not possible N The system was not able to detect whether a vehicle is connected The reason for this might be the diagnostic hardware used Before you continue please check that the diagnostic connector is connected to the vehicle correctly Continue Cancel Figure 6 9 Vehicle identification not possible Repeat Vehicle identification is repeated Continue The system resumes diagnostic start up Cancel Diagnostic start up is cancelled Diagnostic start up is automatically resumed without a message if the
153. dn a 178 Selo Tn a A ET E E E PT E N N TA EE T 180 8 1 DOCUMERIS re ee E A see 181 8 1 D cummentsin the GER nase rei 188 8 2 ANCUONS Alte ee es codes sell etans di tete 190 WO 191 192 895 CHEN Ol Aran VAD rain 193 8 6 VENICIS taD ero en ne a a de sett iets rete A tas 193 S e PR NOs TAD eek nee ade 195 2 Test instruments 196 Dle Test nsents In eneral es en a nd ea ee ea a a a A E 196 2 197 9 2 1 Voltage measurement with the URDI measuring lead pp 203 9 2 2 Current measurement with the URDI measuring lead pp 204 9 2 3 Resistance measurement with the URDI measuring lead pp 205 0 24 Diode test with the URDI me s nng lead arena Asa ee aa iectetaxdas 206 9 2 5 Continuity test with the URDI measuring lead pp 208 9 2 6 Voltage measurement via the DSO1 measuring socket pp 209 9 2 7 Current measurement with the clamp on ammeter pp 209 9 2 8 Pressure measurement via I P device SOCKEL lt i u a ana ne eine a 211 9 2 9 Temperature measurement via T P device socket au aan aa 212 9 3 NE Ose1lloscope Client aa 212 9 3 1 11288 positon and lime Base ern 215 ne 210 9233 Setlins he mesine mode sa aan near 219 9 3 4 Lons term measurement in draw mode esse ea ia ah 222 0 3 9 Trigger Patameinsal0n sn ar en 226 93 0 Bandwidth mit see ses anne al aan 230 03 1 Pa e CURVE T nclon e em i a a a 230 ee 234 9 4 Accepting measured values from diagnostic mode pp 235 237 10 Virtual keyboard manual Se
154. dule for navigation DID_19 1300 4 Control module for navigation with CD mechanism J401 No signalcommunication Intermittent Charge Air Pressure Gauge G30 Figure 12 12 Example of a search result 313 Additional program functions The test program Connection to the air conditioning control unit was selected in the search results here and the Go to button was clicked on Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service attaches the corresponding test program to the test plan and switches to the test plan view 2 Note The search function will not be active until after diagnostic start up has taken place If no diagnostic start up has taken place the button or the magnifying glass symbol is inactive and it is not possible to search for object types Note If the search function is started using the Component selection it is only possible to search for the diagnostic object object type 12 2 2 VCI VCI It is possible to change the diagnostic hardware 2 Note Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service has been prepared for the use of PassThru boxes The following models can be used with Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service without restrictions e Blue Streak Electronics Inc iflash Global Programmer e Dearborn Group VSI 2534 e Drew Technologies CarDAQ Plus e I ME Actia GmbH PassThru XS The PassThru boxes listed have already been configured as diagnostic interfaces in
155. e k Warnungen Hinweise Volkswagen Phaeton mit Zwei Batterie Konzept Reihenfolge beim Abklemmen der Batterien Vorsicht Wird die Reihenfolge nicht eingehalten kann die pyrotechnische Batterieabtrennung ausgel st und die elektrische Fahrzeugausstattung besch digt werden 1 Klemmen Sie zuerst die Batterie im Kofferraum rechts ab 2 Klemmen Sie danach die Batterie im Kofferraum links ab Lagerung Transport und Entsorgung von Airbag Gurtstraffer und Batterieabtrennungseinheiten pyrotechnische Bauteile Die Lagerung unterliegt der jeweiligen nationalen Gesetzgebung Der Transport unterliegt nationalen und internationalen Rechtsvorschriften in denen Verpackung Kennzeichnung Bezettelung und Begleitpapier im Detail geregelt sind Nicht gez ndete pyrotechnische Bauteile sind entsprechend der nationalen Gesetzgebung in der Originalverpackung einer ordnungsgem en Verwertung zuzuf hren Bei Fragen wenden Sie sich bitte an ihren Importeur Nur vollst ndig gez ndete pyrotechnische Bauteile d rfen ber den Gewerbem ll entsorgt werden Figure 5 3 Window with warnings notes part 2 OK The window is closed After closing this window Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is available for work gt Reference For more details see Additional functions info chapter 39 Application start user interface Welcome to Diagnosis Goal full scope of diagnostic functionality Once the vehicle ha
156. e 12 35 Mail server login for feedback Cancel Feedback transmission is cancelled If the login data the login name or the password is entered incorrectly error message ODS9106E appears with a note on the incorrect login data W Feedback mail server login Global user 1D Fassword Error There are 4 feedback that vou can now send ODSII0BGE Infrastructure Feedback Login to mail server S4DE6PSA461 t oystems com failed Please check the login name andor the password Apply The user and password data entered is used to log on to the mail server and send the feedback Figure 12 36 Incorrect mail server login 328 Additional program functions Cancel Feedback transmission is cancelled Cy Reference See Outgoing mail server details in the Administration chapter 2 Note If there s currently no online connection the support request is stored temporarily in the system and sent the next time an online connection is established Information The message could not be sent and will be placed inthe queue It willbe sent together with the next message Figure 12 37 Feedback message with offline connection OK The message is confirmed and closed 329 Additional program functions 12 4 Info After starting Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service a window is displayed with general warnings and notes The following figures show the window with different positions of the scroll bar
157. e available on this tab In order to be able to define settings first select the settings by clicking on them in the left hand selection window The configuration options are then available in the right hand window Reset To reset previously saved changes to the factory settings click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 2 Note If you change system settings Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service may no longer work Only make changes to the configuration after being requested to do so by Support Changes made on your own are your responsibility The following administration areas are available 2 General brand design 2 General language 2 General update 2 General system logging 2 General system environment 2 General licence information 2 General global configuration 2 General GFF sequence 2 General keyboard settings 2 Storage locations database 2 Storage locations diagnostic session 2 Storage locations flash paths 267 Administration mode 2 Storage locations diagnostic protocol 2 Support contact data 2 Support outgoing mail server 2 Connections brand settings 2 Connections Group system GFF 2 Connections Group system ElsaPro 2 Connections Group system Carport 2 Connections
158. e diagnostic data willbe deleted The diagnostic log can still be printed aut then or saved as required Figure 6 83 Ending fault finding Yes Guided fault finding is continued and not ended 110 Diagnostic mode No Guided fault finding is ended and exiting the diagnostic session is thus continued If the vehicle is changed during a diagnostic session Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service asks whether the repair of the connected vehicle is to be continued or whether the current session is to be cancelled Fahrzeuewechsel Ein Fahrzeugwechsel wurde wahrend der laufenden Diagnosesitzung erkannt Bitte wahlen Sie Abbrechen um den laufenden Vorgang abzubrechen Und die Reparatur des angeschlossenen Fahrzeuges abzuschlielsen oder best tigen Sie mittels Fortsetzen um die laufende Sitzung zu beenden und mit dem Ausstieg aus der Diagnose fortzufahren Fortsetzen Abbrechen Figure 6 84 Erasing the event memory Continue Exiting the diagnostic session is continued Cancel Click on this button to cancel the diagnostic exit and continue the repair of the connected vehicle If during the repeated query of the event memories new or previously set ones were found Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service will ask you whether a new test plan is to be calculated Exit GFF Decision exit GFF 2 Al event memor entries have been erased However there are still new or already familar event mem
159. e following measuring function can be set as a trigger by clicking on the arrow of the Channel pop up menu e OFF No measurement connection selected e DSO2 DSO socket 2 e DSO1 DSO socket 1 e KV KV clamp via KV device socket e Temp Temperature via T P device socket or also depending on the device Temp T P 1 and Temp T P 2 via T P 1 and T P2 device sockets e Pressure Pressure via T P device socket or also depending on the device Pressure T P 1 and Pressure T P 2 via T P 1 and T P2 device sockets e SZ Clamp on ammeter via SZ device socket e Trigger pick up Trigger pick up via TZ device socket The available measuring signals of the set measuring function can then be used as a trigger event to trigger a measurement of the oscilloscope Onote For the selected trigger channel the corresponding measuring lead must be connected to the corresponding device socket If no measuring lead is connected the Trigger missing error message is displayed in the display area 2 Selecting the trigger coupling To set the measuring mode click on the arrow of the Coupling pop up menu e AC coupling against alternating current voltage With an AC coupling any DC voltage proportions of a measuring signal are blocked and only the AC voltage proportion is displayed That is practical if the DC voltage component of a measuring signal 1s much higher than the AC voltage component which would be falsified by the indicated value 228 T
160. e name of each control unit 71 Diagnostic mode 62 Door Electronics Rear Left Left rear door electronics 1 K0353703K 1207 Tuer SG 006 72 g Door Electronics Rear Right Right rear door electronics 1K0959704K 1207 Tuer SG O06 Figure 6 33 Information on a control unit More information about the control unit is available in brackets after the control unit name The name of the variant is only displayed if a variant has been set System name Variant Software part number Software version number System designation There are several ways to sort these columns 82 Sorting ve Click on the Sort preference button An additional button appears that can be used to sort the table s contents Event in ascending order Name in ascending order Figure 6 34 Sorting the control unit list Address ascending To sort the control units by diagnostic address value beginning with the smallest value click on this button Event ascending This button sorts the control units by the number of their events Name ascending This button lists all the control units in alphabetical order In all there are three ways of sorting the address event and name 1 In ascending order address number number of events control unit name 2 In descending order address number number of events control unit name 3 Unsorted address number number of events control unit name The sort preference can be chan
161. e relevant parameters and actuators are marked accordingly E Switches to the next view the Measured value selection As long as problems still exist during parametrisation 1 e at least one parameter is marked in red clicking on the button will cause an error message to be displayed informing the user that there is still a data problem You can only switch to the next view when all parameters have valid values 1 e when no parameters are marked in red any more a Switches back to the previous view Even if actuators were added or removed there all settings made are retained for the remaining actuators Reference See also chapter Error messages Measured value selection 154 Diagnostic mode Orders Process 17 Dash Board JOS ISTF SsCos2z0e 726 0206 i XOT EV Kombi UDS WOD RMOS Ao4040 Results Control Units Actuator diagnosis Select measured values Segment test P O Name Selection OEOO 29 Status of rear safety belt 3rd row IOEOO YOO ES Max oil level in service interval IDEUNFZE _ Status of rear safety belt 2nd row IBEOOGSS EST Service interval exceeded ind E ee IDEO0899 _ESI Min oil level in service interval IDEO2491 Status input signals high beam ass IDEO2499 Status comfort 1 amp DE02498 _5tatus transmission 1 m i If Doro man sten Ton I m 17 DTM p 4 Figure 6 13
162. e to the programmable read only memory EEP ROM As opposed to the default setting the respective control circuit is in closed state The adaptation is used to determine system specific parameters and save them to the vehicle system Association for Standardization of Automation and Measuring Systems http www asam net Open Diagnostic Data Exchange Each of the basic functions of the tester that can be accessed via the start screen Flash Diagnosis Info and Admin Each mode consists of a number of individual functions An industrial standard for radio transmission between devices over a short distance A program on the PC for connecting to a server For example a network client is a program that connects to a server in the network so that the PC can be operated as a workstation in the network Connector socket for the diagnostic cable on the tester or on the vehicle Collective term for diagnostic functions assemblies or components modelled in the diagnostic object tree Not to be confused with diagnostic bus object def operating manual DES VW A11 0 An object function component or component group to which the diagnostic function is applied Diagnostic objects should be named according to the master list Even if cur rently not relevant this needs to be done in the future for the circuit diagrams on the tester to be requested according to the terminology from Elsa in the master list The diagnostic protoco
163. ease contact Support ment parameter of communication job ODSSS55E Unknown requirement parameter for commu nication Job ODS5556E The value for requirement parameter could Please contact Support not be converted into type ODS5557E The value for requirement parameter cannot Please contact Support be converted into type ODSS5S558E The value for requirement parameter could Please contact Support not be entered 341 Please contact Support Error messages ODSS5559E Control unit communication not possible com Please contact Support munication job ODS5560E Error during control unit communication Please contact Support job control unit connection ODS5570E Measured value table could not be found Please contact Support ODS5571E Entry in measured value table not found Please contact Support ODS5572E Control unit from measured value table not Please contact Support found ODS5573E No valid entries found in measured value ta Please contact Support ble ODS6003F The brand of the installed diagnostic data dif Please contact Support fers from the brands in the certificate ODS6004F The software version installed differs from the Please contact Support version in the certificate ODS6005F The hardware key in certificate does not cor Please contact Support respond t
164. ease login again at a later time sions for your flat rate has been reached It is not possible to log in until an existing user session O is available ODS2500E The Group system has indicated a fault Please contact Support DS2501F No MCD system found Please check the instal Please contact Support lation of the MCD system ODS2502E _ Data does not exist Possible causes could be the following Please contact Support ODS2503E Unable to read determine VIN Check that the vehicle is connected and the ig nition is switched on ODS2504F No MCD DTS system found Please contact Support Please check the printer settings or contact your ODS2506E Unable to print correctly No access to the printer system administrator ODS2507E Unable to create the print layout for the graphic Please contact Support ODS2508F Important Softing libraries could not be found Possible causes 1 MCD server is not installed Please correct this by installing the current MCD server 2 The working directory of the MCD server is not within the system path 3 The working directory of the MCD server can not be accessed Please contact Support ODS2509F Important Softing libraries show discrepancies Please correct this by installing the current MCD between installed and expected versions server Please contact Support ODS2510F The ECF framework for access to the MCD sys Please correct this by installing the latest EDF
165. easuring lead 206 Test Instruments mode 2 To activate the Diode test URDI measuring function use the button of the same name Multimeter Oscilloscope iia Ae Sse lt i oe FF RA aie Figure 9 8 Client area for activated Diode test URDI 2 The result of the diode test is then displayed as a diagram in the display area The following four states can be distinguished e Short circuit diode defective or the connected object being measured does not have a diode function e Interruption diode defective or the connected object being measured does not have a diode function e Diode connected in forward direction ei e Diode connected in reverse direction 207 Test Instruments mode PP 9 2 5 Continuity test with the URDI measuring lead 2 To activate the Continuity test URDI measuring function use the button of the same name Multimeter Oscilloscope ae B 5 lt a Toren Continuity JRDI test URDI TY 7 te Ny x RAT a f ni Jre ii ke yes Mie oe N Figure 9 9 Client area for activated Continuity test URDI 2 The result of the continuity test is displayed as a symbol in the display area The following two states can be distinguished e Circuit closed if line resistance lt 2 ohm If the circuit is closed an audible signal also sounds e Circuit open 208 Test Instruments mode 9 2 6
166. ect variant Read event memon Read all event memoried x Guided functions Control unit self diagnosi 4 Vehicle self diagnosis gt Figure 6 38 Context menu control unit buttons If you click on the Test instruments button Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches to Test instruments mode gt Reference See also chapter Test instruments For a preferred or subsequent identification of a control unit depending on the time of the call click on the Identify control units button e The preferred identification is applied during automatic control unit identification The order of automatic control unit identification is changed here e Subsequent identification is applied after control unit identification An undetected and identified control unit is subsequently entered as installed manually here If the entry is made by confirming the message from Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service displayed below the control unit is entered as installed manually Note amp Control unit cannot be identified Do you want stil want to enter it as installed Figure 6 39 Entering a control unit as installed Yes The control unit is marked as entered as installed manually and displayed in the block diagram and the control unit list accordingly No The control unit s marked as not entered as installed If a control unit has been subsequently entered as installed manually because it
167. ected measuring mode is displayed in the centre of the bottom part of the display area blue text 219 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Oscilloscope Freeze frame Normal Target curves Figure 9 17 Setting the measuring mode 2 Note Which measuring mode buttons are visible depends on the channel parametrisation Measuring modes that are not supported by the measuring functions assigned to the channels are hidden 2 Recording measured values in auto setup mode Click on the Auto Setup button to perform automatic setup i e the amplitude of the active channels the timebase and the trigger threshold are automatically set Auto setup is carried only once after each call Measuring mode then switches automatically to auto level mode 2 Recording measured values in auto level mode Auto Level Click on the Auto Level button to automatically update the relative trigger threshold set percentage threshold in the range of 100 of the signal amplitude so that there is always only one triggered signal regardless of the signal amplitude 220 Test Instruments mode ONote Auto Setup and Auto Level can only work correctly ifthere is a periodic signal with a low degree of interference In Auto Level measuring mode signals can be triggered regardless of their amplitude height and zero position since triggering refers to a percentage amplitude value When switching from Auto Setup mode triggering is automa
168. ections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand design Details on Language Language setting Language Update Language English GB x System logging Licence information English US System environment fran ais Global configuration GFF sequence Figure 11 3 Language setting The desired language can be selected from the Language list in Language details The default selection is Automatically i e the language corresponds to the operating system of the test device Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 270 Administration mode uD Note This only changes the language for the user interface If documents exist in the changed language they are dis played in the newly set language otherwise the documents remain in the languages installed To use Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service in different languages in particular languages with East Asian characters the following steps are required In the Windows operating system open Control Panel gt Regional and language options Regional and Language Options 2 leg EC Regional Options Languages Advanced Text services and input languages To view or change the languages and methods you can use to enter text click Detail
169. ed as an option to display documents either for the test plan or for a test program selected For this Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches to the Info tab 97 Diagnostic mode Select own test This button can be used to open the Overview of tests window that can be used to add one s own test programs to the test plan for individual diagnostic objects of the vehicle Remove This button can be used to remove one s own manually added test program from the test plan again Reference Further explanations For the documents provided in guided fault finding further descriptions are available in the chapter Info mode Documents To select a test program test either click on the text line highlighted in grey or on the corresponding symbol Orders piss TP Process Special functions Control units Test Plan Tests in current test plan Status Tests sorted by their potential success a 4 Ignition key 232 a Drivetrain data BUS Fault in engine control module gt amp Drivers Window Regulator Motor V 147 Ba Thermal protection central locking fe 2ZKS_46 1038 0 Central locking overheating protection Intermittent This test checks the thermal protection of Comfort System Central Control Module J393 Perform test Select own test F Figure 6 69 Activating a test in the test plan The Perform test button is enabled after clicking on it The content o
170. ed by the user clicking on the fa button Some control units permit diagnosis to be continued on the next actuator during the functional sequence In this case the Hib button is enabled while the function is in progress Click on this button to stop diagnosis on the current actuator and continue it on the next actuator For control units that use the KWP 2000 protocol measured values are read in cycles by the control unit in addition to the diagnostic status A selection is not possible The measured values displayed are specified by the control unit When actuator diagnosis is finished the test result is displayed in the Actuator diagnosis Status field Orders N Results Control units 17 Dash Board KWYP2000 TP20 7300920871 X 716147007 Actuator diagnosisStatus Actuator diagnosis in progress 662 Rev counter Figure 6 134 Actuator diagnosis status If additional values were read by the control unit they are displayed in the Measured values table The left hand column contains the name of the measured value the measured value is displayed in the column in the middle and its unit s displayed in the right hand column 151 Diagnostic mode 6 6 2 7 2 Actuator diagnosis on UDS control units For control units with UDS protocol actuator diagnosis can be configured more extensively After selecting the Actuator diagnosis function for a UDS control unit the user is first taken to the Actuator selecti
171. ed dealers can log on to the Group systems here again 190 Info mode 8 3 History tab The History tab shows the vehicle s repair history from ElsaPro The manual for ElsaPro provides a more detailed list of the contents Documents Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Vehicle PR no Reparaturhistorie Fahrzeugdaten Fahrzeugidentnr WYUWZZZ1IZ3W376491 nachste HU 2005 12 Zulassung 2002 12 11 Typ 135014 nachste AU 0000 00 Historie Alles IV Stornos ausblenden 1 Rechnung Annahme Datum KM Stand Auftrags Nr Rechnungs Nr Anmerk 2006 06 30 236189 76628300 785836 Wartung 2 Rechnung Annahme Datum KM Stand Auftrags Nr Rechnungs Nr Anmerk 2005 12 15 102104 502730601 3033612009 Wartung sles Figure 8 13 History tab view Scroll forward a page Scroll back a page You can use this button to reload content Authorised dealers can log on to the Group systems here again 191 Info mode 8 4 Manuals tab Click on the Manuals tab to access workshop manuals Vehicle PR no Reparaturleitfaden A Documents Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Suche Erweiterte Suche Vorderradbremse instand setzen Bremssattel FS Ill 5 Reparaturleitfaden Ben tigte Spezialwerkzeuge Pr f und Me ger te sowie Hilfsmittel 0 Antriebsaggregat Fahrwerk a Bremsanlagen 9 00 Technische Daten 01 45 ABS ADR ASR EDS ESP 46 Brem
172. ed to the vehicle agnostic ha INFRAROT ULTRASCHALL VAS5054 Figure 12 16 Connecting the new diagnostic hardware 3 Connecting the new diagnostic hardware to the vehicle and confirming it n the dialogue box Cancel The diagnostic hardware change is cancelled ULTRASCHALL VAS5054 Figure 12 17 Changing the diagnostic hardware 316 Additional program functions 4 Clicking on Change to confirm the connection of the new diagnostic hardware Cancel The diagnostic hardware change is cancelled The change is thus completed bE Chanee diagnostic hardware Act Diagnostic hardware INFRAROT ULTRASCHALL VAS5054 The diagnostic hardware has been successfully changed Figure 12 18 Diagnostic hardware has been changed Close The dialogue for changing the diagnostic hardware is closed If the change fails Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service will inform you of this in the dialogue Der Wechsel ist fenigeschlagen A Eine Fahreeugdagnese ist alent m glich Bitte berpr fen Sie die Diagnose Hardware am Fahrzeug und f hren Sie den Wechsel emeut durch Schlieben Figure 12 19 Changing the diagnostic hardware failed Close The window is closed If problems occur while changing the diagnostic hardware please contact Support gt Reference See chapter Diagnostic start up 317 Additional program functions 12 2 3 Test drive
173. eile d rfen weder ge ffnet noch repariert werden grunds tzlich nur Neuteile verwenden Verletzungsgefahr Pyrotechnische Bauteile die auf eine harte Unterlage herabgefallen sind oder Besch digungen zeigen d rfen nicht mehr verbaut werden Vor dem Hantieren mit pyrotechnischen Bauteilen des Ruckhaltesystems zum Beispiel dem Trennen der elektrischen Steckverbindung muss sich der Mechaniker elektrostatisch entladen Das elektrostatische Entladen wird durch das Ber hren von geerdeten Metallteilen zum Beispiel durch kurzes Anfassen des T rschlie keils erreicht Der Einbau von pyrotechnischen Bauteilen hat unmittelbar nach der Entnahme aus dem Transportbeh lter zu erfolgen Bei Arbeitsunterbrechung ist das pyrotechnische Bauteil wieder im Transportbeh lter abzulegen Ein unbeaufsichtigtes Liegenlassen des pyrotechnischen Bauteils ist nicht zul ssig Pyrotechnische Bauteile d rfen nicht mit Fett Reinigungsmitteln oder hnlichem behandelt werden Pyrotechnische Bauteile d rfen auch nicht kurzfristig Temperaturen ber 100 C ausgesetzt werden Spezielle Hinweise f r Fahrer und Beifahrerairbags Fahrer und Beifahrerairbageinheiten sind im ausgebauten Zustand so zu lagern dass die gepolsterte Seite nach oben zeigt Bei den folgenden Fahrzeugen die eine Erstzulassung in den USA besitzen sind unter Umst nden 2 stufige Airbageinheiten verbaut bei denen nach Z ndung der 1 Stufe die 2 Stufe weiterhin funktionsf hig ist Vol
174. eir corresponding default values click on this button Whether values are missing or invalid is checked in this case and the relevant parameters and default settings are marked accordingly The left hand list contains the default settings selected in the previous view The first default setting is selected by default 141 Diagnostic mode As soon as a default setting is selected the right hand table displays the corresponding parameters Depending on the type of parameter its value in the right hand column may be selected from a pop up menu or entered as desired If you enter the value freely whether it is valid is checked If problems are detected or if a value is missing the respective parameter is marked in red and the corresponding default setting is displayed in bold red characters Reference See also the Parametrisation problems figure in the Actuator diagnosis chapter E Switches to the next view the Measured value selection As long as problems still exist during parametrisa tion 1 e at least one parameter is marked in red clicking on the button will cause an error message to be displayed You can only switch to the next view when all parameters have valid values 1 e when no parameters are marked in red any more A Switches back to the previous view Even if default settings are added or removed there all settings made are retained for the remaining default settings Reference See also Error messages
175. element from the left hand list to the right hand list CTRL up arrow Moves the selected element one position up within a se lection list CTRL down arrow Moves the selected element one position down within a selection list CTRL N While an actuator test is in progress Next actuator cor responds to the i button ES In the actuator diagnosis conduction view corresponds to the button Table 6 4 Table of keyboard shortcuts 158 Diagnostic mode 6 6 2 8 Access authorisation A dialogue opens with different contents depending on the protocol 6 6 2 8 1 Control units with KWP 1281 protocol For control units that use the KWP 1281 protocol access authorisation is performed automatically after clicking on the function A message informs the user whether login was successful 6 6 2 8 2 Control units with KWP 2000 or UDS protocol After selecting the Access authorisation function a dialogue opens with different contents depending on the protocol D Access authorisation Access authorisation Select login method Please select a login method Login method LOL Login LO _System Specific To use security access do not execute any other diagnostic functions such as the cyclic reading of event memories Cancel Figure 6 142 Access authorisation Back Switches back to the previous dialogue Next Switches to the next dialogue Done Performs access authorisation Cancel Cancel
176. els have been parametrised yet a measurement connection has to be defined as the trigger before any further settings can be made 2 Setting the trigger threshold Use the scroll bar on the right side of the display area to set the trigger threshold to any trigger value 100 of the maximum measuring range The maximum measuring range is displayed in blue font at the top right in the display area The default setting for the trigger is a trigger threshold of 0 The current trigger threshold is shown in the display area by means of an arrow If the trigger threshold is within the valid amplitude range the arrow is shown in the colour of the respective channel If triggering 1s external the arrow is blue If the trigger threshold is outside the valid amplitude range the arrow is red The direction of the arrow pointing up or down indicates whether the trigger is triggered with a rising positive or falling negative edge The trigger voltage is displayed below the scroll bar In Auto Level measuring mode the trigger voltage is shown as a percentage value of the amplitude of the measuring signal e g the trigger voltage is 2 5V if the signal amplitude is 5V and the trigger threshold is set to 50 2 Note If Draw measuring mode is activated the Trigger mode function is not available Untriggered recording of the measured data will then take place 221 Test Instruments mode 2 Selecting the trigger channel Th
177. en mit 2 stufigen Airbageinheiten sind die folgenden Hinweise zus tzlich zu beachten A ACHTUNG Bei Airbageinheiten mit gez ndeter 1 Stufe ist nicht sichergestellt dass die 2 Stufe gez ndet wurde Airbageinheiten bei denen nur die 1 Stufe gez ndet wurde k nnen durch Z ndung der 2 Stufe schwere Verletzungen verursachen Eine M glichkeit zu pr fen ob die 2 Stufe gez ndet wurde steht momentan nicht zur Verf gung Aus diesem Grund sind die genannten Airbageinheiten entsprechend der nationalen Gesetzgebung in der Originalverpackung einer ordnungsgem en Verwertung zuzuf hren Spezielle Hinweise f r Kopfairbagmodule Ausgebaute Kopfairbagmodule im Transportbeh lter oder auf einer sauberen geraden Flache mit untergelegter Decke ablegen Ein Falten ist denkbar sofern dadurch keine Besch digungen insbesondere der Schutzh lle auftreten Kopfairbagmodule sind beim Aus und Einbau mit au erster Sorgfalt zu behandeln um m gliche Besch digungen auszuschlie en Solange der Gasgenerator NICHT verschraubt ist halten Sie ihn w hrend der kompletten Handhabung Transport Aus und Einbau usw fest Spezielle Hinweise f r Gurtstraffer Das offene Ende eines Gurtstraffers darf niemals gegen Personen gerichtet werden Gurtstraffereinheiten sind beim Aus und Einbau mit gr ter Sorgfalt zu behandeln Bei unsachgem er Handhabung besteht im Umgang mit Gurtstraffereinheiten ein hohes Gefahren und Verletzungspotential Bei
178. entry in the Checksum field a warning is displayed No check digit available amp Could not check the code string for errors Do you still wantto save it Figure 6 114 Note on missing checksum during binary coding Yes Writes the code string into the control unit No The code string is not written If a checksum was entered that does not correspond to the code string the following message is displayed 131 Diagnostic mode Wrong check digit The check digit entered is not correct Do you still want to encode Figure 6 115 Note on incorrect checksum during binary coding Yes Still writes the code string into the control unit No The code string is not written If coding was successful another message 1s displayed Status after writing the code Encoding completed successfully Figure 6 116 Success message after coding The new parameter values are now displayed in the table In the event of an error an error message informs the user of the reason why the code not could not be saved Depending on the type of error that occurred the messages may differ e g stating that communication with the vehicle could not be established After rectifying the problem coding can be repeated Reference See also Error messages chapter If coding was successful and no automatic control unit reset was performed after confirming the message the user is requested to manually reset the c
179. ents are only compiled for diagnosed vehicles After switching to Info mode the view of the Documents is open If you switch to Info mode again the tab last activated s displayed Modes Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Vehicle PR no Documents AX Test instruments yp Diagnosis E Info A Admin Data Extras Help lt Info Documents for vehicle Figure 8 2 Info mode start up view Vehicle documents If you click on this button all documents available for the currently identified vehicle are displayed in a tree structure on the Documents tab 181 Info mode PR a Vehicle Documents Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Powertrain Repair Group 01 10 to 26 28 to 39 Suspension Repair Group 01 40 to 49 Body Repair Group 01 27 50 to 97 Software version management Documents special tools test equipment and gauges tools Vehicle information documents Component location Documents Function test instructions Relay carrier socket Connector view control module Documents harness connectors Steckeransicht Es Not translated poliger Stecker Not translated 3C Steckeransicht Steuerger t f r Kraftstoffpump Not translated 3C Stecker Steuerger t f r Kraftstoffpumpe Documents for vehicle Show document Figure 8 3 Selecting a document to be di
180. equent login to the Group systems is possible D Note The contents of the following tabs are provided via Group system services A single login to the Group systems for each diagnostic session and the online connection to the network are required for this You can use the and buttons to scroll backwards and forwards if the contents are spread over several pages The amp button can be used to reload content or by the authorised dealer to repeat login If content is reloaded the corresponding start page of the window is loaded Documents Campaigns History viring diagrams Manuals Vehicle PR na Figure 8 1 Tabs in Info mode These tabs are available in Info mode 2 Documents 2 Actions 2 History 2 Circuit diagrams 2 Manuals 2 Vehicle 2 PR No Every tab can be opened by clicking on it 180 Info mode 8 1 Documents Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service provides a number of documents These documents come from the knowledge base in the diagnostic database and apply to the diagnosed vehicle with its equipment variants Documents can also be opened in Diagnostic or Flash mode For this Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service automatically switches from diagnostic or flash mode to Info mode Cy Reference See also chapter Using GFF 2 Note The document tree can only be displayed on the Documents tab after diagnostic or flash start up since the docum
181. esponding chapter In addition the navigation bar item 4 in the figure with the online help window further up can be used to navigate n the help Shen Figure 12 29 Navigation bar of the online help You can use the navigation bar displayed above from the left to the right to navigate backwards and forwards access the start page of the online help display the table of contents set a bookmark print the help text and maximise the help window 324 Additional program functions 12 3 2 Support Support There are several ways of sending a support request or feedback from Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 2 For standard functions that are always visible use the Support button to send a support request at any time 2 The question whether feedback is to be sent is part of the process of exiting a diagnostic or flash session Reference See Ending diagnosis chapter See Flash mode chapter 2 On exiting the application it is also possible to send feedback This button is used to open the Send support request window Send support request SEI Information on the feedback sender Hotline First name E mail Telephone Surmanme Telephone E mail address ee end Manufacturer YW Error classification Hardware error Software error Content error Incorrect translation Vehicle cannot be assigned clearly Priority For your information Order processing only possible to a lim
182. ess Address System SB Event i Refresh Wy ge 19 Gateway KW P2000 TP20 3C0907530C 7 0040 7007 Event nov On Mo runtime data available OK lin cycles 01 Engine Control Module 1 OK J Sec gz Transmission Control Module OK OS Brakes 1 OK 03 Alr conditioning OK gg Central Electrics GRK OF Radio Tuner Digital OK 15 Airbag ORK 16 Steering Column Electronics OR Fr Dash Board OK 1G Vehicle Position Detection ORK 22 All Wheel Control OK 25 Immobilizer OK 36 Seat Adjustment Driver Side OR 4 Door Electronics Driver Side Event VEH COMP LIST x Figure 6 152 Installation list Address The diagnostic address of the control unit System The name of the control unit SB Sleep bit Indicates whether the vehicle bus is in standby mode Event The number of events in the control unit s event memory Available subsystems are also displayed If a control unit has subsystems 1 e subordinate control units this is indicated by a Click on it to open the subsystems The first level is open by default In the example here that is the diagnostic interface to which all other control units are subordinate 165 Diagnostic mode Control units for which events occurred are marked in red In addition the number of events is displayed in the Event column Control units coded as installed but that cannot be addressed are marked in red and displayed in bold characters D 55 Headlight Regulation KWVYP2000 TP20 5
183. ession in diagnostic mode it is also possible to subsequently mark control units as installed change control unit variants check individual control units using guided functions or perform a complete self diagnosis 48 Diagnostic mode 6 2 Diagnostic start up In the Diagnostic start up section the vehicle is connected and identified GMD login to the Group systems is performed a corresponding order is selected from ElsaPro the vehicle s control units are identified and finally the start of GFF is initiated Testplan and special functions Executing Executing Ending start modules tasts GFF Executing WY traversion Calculating the test plan Ending Diagnosis d test plan DISS TPI Figure 6 2 Diagnostic start up section 49 Diagnostic mode 6 2 1 Starting diagnosis The Start diagnosis section describes the connection of the vehicle to Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Diagnostic start up Login to Group Identficating Selecting an order Executing the SMD control units Systems Figure 6 3 Start diagnosis section Importer Vehicle identification no Dealer Engine X fa gt 4 Order gt gt Modes 3 Test instruments B Flashing Welcome to the diagnostic program Wy Diagnosis Objective comprehensive diagnostic functionality E Info After you have connected the vehicle and the
184. est Instruments mode e DC coupling against direct current voltage With aDC coupling DC and AC voltage proportions are displayed e GND Ground coupling with earth 2 Selecting the filter To select the filter type click on the arrow of the Filter pop up menu Undesired signal components in the high or low frequency range of the measuring signal can thus be attenuated OFF No filter is active e HE high pass filter Filters out everything below a frequency limit e LF low pass filter Filters out everything above a frequency limit 2 Selecting the trigger edge To select the trigger edge click on the arrow of the Edge pop up menu e pos Measuring signal triggered with rising edge e neg Measuring signal triggered with rising edge In case of a positive or negative edge the arrow trigger threshold in the display area is displayed with the arrow pointing up or down 2 Moving the trigger point horizontally To move the trigger point to the left or right on the grid click on the blue arrow buttons pointing horizontally arrow in the display area If the trigger point is outside the display area after being moved the arrow is red 2 Setting the range of values for the trigger amplitude To set the range of values for the trigger amplitude click on the blue vertical arrow buttons 229 Test Instruments mode For externally triggered measuring signals changing the range of values for t
185. est instruments amp Flashing The vehicle has been identified ii I info uM Admin On the Special functions tab Data x Extras Y Help you can execute flash programs Info v Trace By pressing the Flash button you can close the flash session 2 El le Figure 7 17 Ending a flash session Flashing an If you click on this button exiting the flash session is started and this must be confirmed in a query that follows Please confirm amp Do you wantto end the current flash session Figure 7 18 Ending a flash session Yes The flash sess on is ended No The flash session is not ended Like for exiting guided fault finding end module programs may be applied depending on the vehicle It is also possible to send feedback on the flash session This feedback can also be skipped Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service then switches back to the start screen in Flash mode Cy Reference For more details on exiting guided fault finding see the Ending diagnosis chapter 179 Chapter 8 Info mode Info mode combines all functions required for information Most of this information is provided by the Volkswa gen Group systems which is why an active connection with valid login is particularly important here Inf Click on this button to switch to Info mode It is possible to do this from all other modes provided diagnostic start up or flash start up has taken place Subs
186. et options the tick needs to be removed from the Display short Http error message property 2 Note If a firewall is activated while Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is being installed an error message may appear Access to OffboardDiagLauncher exe must not be blocked gt Reference See also chapter Additional error messages 31 Installation 32 Chapter 4 Update Regular software and data updates are available for Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service The update cycle and login data required for automatic updates can be configured in Admin mode Reference See also Administration chapter General area and Connections area Each time the program is started the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater searches for updates in the start configuration of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater oes Update Enter configuration data URL http 1 112 198 71 81 daw Username Password Figure 4 1 Data update via network URL The URL for the update server mirror server 2 can be changed here for updates via the network The URL default setting is applied from the admin area and may be changed there permanently Select local directory If the update is installed via CD DVD or a network drive this button can be used to select the drive with the update CD DVD inserted or the folder on the network drive The user name a
187. f no valid path information is available here local access to flash files is not possible 2 Storage locations diagnostic protocol The storage location and the choice of names for diagnostic protocol in Windows file system are specified here Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service proposes a default setting Test instruments Test instruments Action Connections Support General Storage locations Database Details on Diagnostic log Diagnostic log Diagnostic session Flash paths Target directory ram Files Offboard_Diagnostic_Information_System_Service Diagnostic Protocols Diagnostic log File name pattern VIN_ YYYY 9 6MM DD_ hh mm ss_dprot reset oscars Save Figure 11 17 Diagnostic protocol view Select The storage location for the diagnostic protocol can be entered under Diagnostic protocol in the Target directory field in Diagnostic protocol details During a session the Windows Save dialogue can be used to save the protocol data to a different location File name pattern A name pattern for the protocol can be selected in this text field In the example displayed the file name consists of the VIN the date with four digit year two digit month and day and the exact time e g VIN_2009 08 10_14 32 34_dprot 286 Administration mode These specifications are possible e YYYYY for the current year e MMMH for the current month e DD for the current day of the month e hh for the
188. f the selected test program is displayed below the list to explain it Perform test To start the test program click on this button Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches to the Process tab on which the instructions and input options for the test program started are displayed 98 Diagnostic mode Process Thermal protection Comfort system central CM gt Done Continue Thermal protection checking Preparation steps Test requirements Evaluating DTC memory 1 Battery voltage OK 2 FuseOK Thermal protection checking control module for Have test requirements been met en Lock vehicle Unlock vehicle lt gt Figure 6 70 Test view on the Process tab The name of the active test program is displayed at the top left in the example above Error in ECU with the name of the current individual step below it in the example above Message Done Continue This button is used to confirm a message and go to the next test step Cancel test If the test is ended prematurely by clicking on this button this cancelled test step is indicated by the W symbol on the Test plan tab under the Status column Help This button is activated if a help text is available for the test program Use the navigation buttons below the messages to navigate within the individual messages gt Back to the first message This button is only active if there is more than one message Shows the last message available
189. fault setting lt a switches back to the parametrisation For this the configuration of the default setting is interrupted That also applies if the tab is closed or exited If the user then returns to the Configure default setting view it is not automatically continued but needs to be re started manually If you clicked on Hib to switch to the next default setting click on gt to execute the currently selected default setting When it is finished the process s continued with the next default setting in the list Once the end of the list has been reached the first list entry follows The measured values of the currently configured default setting are open by default All other are closed however During this process the gt button is disabled and greyed out Click on P to stop the currently configured default setting It can be continued with Hi For this the currently selected default setting is used to start regard less of at which point the process was interrupted Some default setting operations require the user s action If that is the case the required action is displayed in the table of measured values for the currently active measured value Once the action has been performed the process of defining settings is automatically continued gt Reference See also the example for KWP control units After configuring the default setting the newly configured measured values are displayed If the default setting was not su
190. finding Calculate test plan chapter To re read only the event memory entries of the selected control unit click on the Read event memory button The test plan is automatically updated in the process To read the event memories of all control units identified click on the Read all event memories button The test plan is thus also updated After identification of a control unit the Guided functions button can be used to open a selection that includes all function tests for this control unit e g actuator diagnosis for the crash signal If a function test 1s selected and you click on the Execute button the program is executed on the Process tab 71 Diagnostic mode rude functions Central Electrics le Ce nn nn rm ne Final control diagnosis Control module for wiper motor coding J400 Coding Vehicle Electrical System CM J519 Leayving home time adapting Read measuring values Vehicle Electrical system CM Heated windshield heating time adapting Coding Vehicle Electrical System CM J519 Heated outside mirror heating time adapting Headlamp cleaning system adapting Dimmer value of footwell lighting adapting Execute Cancel Figure 6 42 Selecting a guided function for a control unit Execute A selected guided function is executed by clicking on this button on the Process tab Cancel The Guided Functions window is closed Self diagnosis button and Vehicle self diagnosis button
191. for updates every five days enter the number 5 here Time for update The desired update time can be specified here Update on Monday Sunday The desired day of the week is selected here Start update after s A delay in time for the update start is entered here in seconds Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button 215 Administration mode Save To save your changes click on the Save button 2 Note If 0 is entered as the value for the update cycle in days Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service never searches for existing updates New data thus might be overlooked 2 General system logging A selection window can be used to define the system logging contents The system log is written into a log file which is sent with the feedback General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand design Details on System logging System logging Language Update m Setting Information v Fatal errors System logging Licence information System environment Global configuration GFF sequence Figure 11 7 System configuration view If the feedback support team requires more detailed information the contents can be set in System logging details under Setting The selection
192. function defect Concern type Constraints UM usage trigger via voice control General constraints Figure 6 65 Coding wizard The coding wizard can be used to make entries in the fields for the customer code To simplify the process the coding wizard specifies the code fields required step by step in the correct technical order with a green border The code levels to be completed are on the left in the form of buttons 1 e groups and sub groups of compo nents functions complaint types boundary conditions and gen boundary conditions Fields in which the selected code values are displayed are next to the buttons When an entry is made in a code field all buttons of the subordinate fields that can now also be completed are enabled The corresponding values for the buttons with a green border for completing are displayed n the right hand win dow which are selected by clicking on them The active button is displayed as the heading The figure above shows the Boundary conditions button Boundary conditions and gen boundary conditions are marked and inserted or removed by clicking on the direction buttons lt lt or gt gt It is also possible to click on an enabled button on the left side regardless of the coding wizard s proposals which is then displayed with a green border and can then be completed After completing them the coding wizard continues with its proposed specifications as described above 2 Note
193. ge document Documents Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Venice PR na t Powertrain Repair Group 01 10 to 26 28 to 39 t Suspension Repair Group 01 40 te 49 Er Body Repair Group 01 27 50 to 9 Ey Blockschaltbild 3 Sollwerte Not translated Codijerzahlen 12 03 Not translated Scheinwertereinstellung Nottra nslated Scheinwerfereinstellung Mot translated G Geber f r Kraftstoffyorratsanzeige Figure 8 7 Example 2 document tree Selection of Body Target values Headlight adjustment 185 Info mode History Documents Actions Circuit daorams Manuais Verice PR no Check if with the low beam switched on the horizontal light dark border touches the mark of division 1 of the test surface and if the break point 2 between the left horizontal part and the right rising part of the light dark border runs vertically through the central mark 3 The light core of the light bundle must be located to the right of the vertical line Figure 8 8 Example 2 document view Image documents may have what are referred to as hot spots Hot spots are image areas with a red border Ty Wa 023 0015 Figure 8 9 Document with hot spot If you click on a hot spot another image 1s opened with a more detailed view of the area within the red border 186 Info mode Figure 8 10 Open hot spot Documents can be printed as the current view gt Refere
194. ged in this order The captions of the buttons are changed accordingly Note Clicking on Change sort preference button again shows the Event descending button Click on the Event descending button to show control units with the most event entries at the beginning of the table This provides a quick overview of the control units with event entries displayed Another way to sort the table s contents is to click on the corresponding column heading in the table To sort the diagnostic addresses in ascending order click on the Address heading once To sort the numbers in descending T2 Diagnostic mode order click on the column heading again To return the diagnostic addresses to the unsorted order in which they were originally read click on the column heading a third time Sorting works the same way for the Event and Name columns Display To change the view between Actual no and Maximum no click on this button Maximum no To show all control units possible for the vehicle model click on this button 6 2 5 2 Block diagram When reading of the control units is started the block diagram for the vehicle may already be displayed on the Control units tab Control units Orders Process Special functions plss TP Test Plan Block diagram AIR_15 AL BRE_03 connector Antrieb Diagnose MOT_01 WEG_25 LKH_44 GET KLH_08 EZZ_4F EZE_09 ZKS_46 SCH_17 TFA_42
195. gungen Ausdrucke zum betriebsinternen Gebrauch sind ohne schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Volkswagen AG erlaubt sofern es sich um einen innerbetrieblichen Zweck handelt Innerbetrieblich hei t hier Nutzung innerhalb des Betriebs mit identischer Betriebsnummer Ausnahme Ausdrucke der Wartungstabellen zu Arbeitszeiten und Messprotokolle d rfen an Kunden weitergegeben werden Die Weitergabe von technischem Know how sowie allgemeine technische Ausk nfte an anerkannte NORA Kunden nach den NORA Grunds tzen der VVV AG sind auszugsweise zul ssig Ausgenommen hiervon sind ausdr cklich 1 Informationen Daten aus RESERVE bzgl der Reparaturhistorie 2 Informationen zu R ckrufaktionen 3 Inhalte des Informationsmittels Handbuch Service Technik 4 Informationen Daten zu Reparaturen von elektronischen Bauelementen Gew hrleistungsarbeiten werden ausschlie lich mit ww Original Teilen ausgef hrt Bei sonstigen Reparaturarbeiten sind die ber AposPro automatisch ausgew hlten Ersatzteile Empfehlungen Im brigen beachten Sie bitte die Regelungen von Artikel 5 und 6 des Service Vertrages Bitte lesen und beachten Sie diese ACHTUNG Vorsicht und Hinweisbeschreibungen bevor Sie Wartungs oder Reparaturarbeiten Figure 5 2 Window with warnings notes part 1 2 Note The OK button for closing the window with warnings and notes is not active until the text has been scrolled down completely Application start user interfac
196. he 2 below the selection options A test program can request decisions using buttons 102 Diagnostic mode Process Connection to Central control module for comfort s Yes Connection toDiagnostic interface for databus EEE EEE No Preparation steps Could a malfunction be detected by wiggling wires and checking connectors and harness connectors Preparation steps Preallocation control modules Preallocation control modules Preallocation for evaluating the FSP Preallocation for evaluating the FSP Selection model Connector names for GolffRabbit Gc End modules Evaluating DTC memory Evaluating DTC memory Evaluating DTC memory Preparation steps Connection toDiagnostic interface fo Zal l gt Kl lt gt gt Figure 6 75 Decision buttons in the test program In the example shown above the question made in the test program requires a decision to be made by clicking on Yes or No The buttons shown here may have different captions depending on the contents of the test program It may also occur that the test program asks you to enter values which you can do using the keyboard In this case an input window is opened instead of the button In addition documents may be stored in test programs for individual test steps 103 Diagnostic mode Process Connection to Central control module for comfort s gt Done Continue Evaluating DTC memory Preparation steps With this test itis possible to che
197. he Multimeter client area Click on the Multimeter tab on the tab bar to activate the corresponding client area Use the Multimeter function to make user defined settings for the measuring leads connected via the device sockets and to use these instruments Measuring functions can be set measurements can be carried out and test results can be read 2 If the Multimeter function is active the following client area is visible 197 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Oscilloscope Figure 9 2 Structure of the Multimeter client area 2 The Multimeter client area consists of the following three areas hispay area The bottom part of the display area is for the graphical display of measured values in the form of bar charts Switching states and measured values for the selected measurement option are displayed in the centre The top part serves to display important system messages for example a message stating that the test instruments are being calibrated operating area Use the various buttons in the operating area to start or end measuring functions and to set the required test parameters such as Coupling and Measuring range gt Reference See also section Setting the test parameters Or unction area Use the corresponding buttons in the function area to select relevant service functions for each measuring function or the selected test procedure service functions not available are hidden from view The fo
198. he trigger amplitude does not have an effect on the measuring range and the depiction of the triggered measuring signal The set range of values for the trigger amplitude is shown in blue in the top right part of the display area The value is only visible if the Trigger mode function is active 2 Note For the trigger pick up is not possible to set the trigger threshold the filter the trigger edge or the trigger am plitude 9 3 6 Bandwidth limit To activate the Bandwidth limit BWL function use the button of the same name This places a low pass filter with a frequency limit of 75kHz on the active measuring channels Bandwidth limitation Activation of the bandwidth limit is shown centred in the display area next to the timebase Onote To prevent the high frequency band from being unintentionally filtered out by means of an activated bandwidth limit when the user has defined a high signal sampling frequency the test instruments application features auto matic deactivation of the BWL function The threshold is a timebase lt 0 1 ms div sampling rate gt 500kHz 9 3 7 Target curve function To activate the Target curves function use the button of the same name To deactivate the function click on the Back button After the function has been activated the respective parametrisation dialogue appears in the operating area 230 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Osciloscope Figure 9
199. he user Initially identical to the value in the Old value default value column Unit The unit of the adaptation value if entered There are four buttons below the table Select channel Selects a channel selected in the list Apply Writes the modified adaptation value into the control unit Reset Resets the test value to the original value 122 Diagnostic mode Reset all If test values were set on several channels they are reset to their original values provided the new values have not yet been saved to the control unit using Apply If the control unit or data input support this function the information area also displays more information on the selected channel e g its designation 17 Dash Board KWP2000 TP20 3C0920871 X 716147007 Language Figure 6 99 Adaptation information area To change the adaptation value of a channel perform the following steps l Select a channel from the list Click on the Select channel button or double click on the desired channel Then the current channel value is displayed in the table Change the adaptation value in the Input table column and confirm it with Enter Then the value is sent to the control unit first as the new test value This procedure may be repeated any number of times 0 Example In the figures above channel 4 was selected For the dash panel insert instrument cluster control unit used in the example the language displayed is set at th s chan
200. herwise access is not possible 2 Connections Group system GFF The network addresses of the group services accessed by Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service can be configured in this area Connections General Storage ocations Support Brand settings porerooormorooorooorooprooroooroorooorooroorooermooroneronorooorom y Group system GFF 1 EEE EEE EEE Group system ElsaPro Service42 Group system eShop PinURL 88 Group system Carport SVM VW USA Fahrzeugdaten2SVM Group system DISS CastleURL_11 Mirror server 2 OnlineFlashen_11 SVM SuS _SVM_11 PinURL SV NW PinURL_11 OnlineFlashen ProtoService Figure 11 23 Group system GFF view Test instruments Test instruments Action Details on Group system GFF https Wilocalcpn cpn vwg Service42 RepairHints asp httpsviV Wlocalcpn cpon vwg PIN PINService asp https VVlocalcpnt vwhub com symyw symywservice asp httpsv VVlocalcpn cpn vwg SVM SVMService asp https VVlocalcpn cpn vwag PIN PINService asp httpivYvlocalcpn 31 MirrorServer bb https Wilocalcpn con vwg SVM SVMService asp https VWilocalcpn symywisvy mywservice asp https v VVvlocalcpn cpn vwag PIN PINService asp https Wilocalcpn con vwg symywisy mywservicebeta asp https VVlocalcpn cpn vwa rta service default asp httpv VVVlocalcpn 31 MirrorServer bb https VVlocalcpn cpn vwg PROTO PROT OService asp The Group system details GFF view lists all service addresse
201. ic components PDU API and MCD server is displayed individually for each component Installation Wise Installation Wizard Figure 3 13 Installing the PDU API lalelr ln ll aT Panel Figure 3 14 Installing the MCD server These installation processes cannot be changed The buttons are greyed out accordingly When the installation of all components is completed the last view of the installation wizard appears 26 Installation Zu Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 Joes Completing the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Setup Wizard Setup has Finished installing Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service on your computer The application may be launched by selecting the installed icons Click Finish to exit Setup Figure 3 15 Installation completed Finish Click on this button to complete the installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service can now be started by double clicking on the Offboard Di agnostic Information System Service shortcut on the desktop Offboard Diagnostic Information System Ser vice can also be started via the start menu Start Programs Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is completed when the application is started for the first time For this the Offboard Diagnostic Information System PostSetup appea
202. ic objects are selected Deselect all All diagnostic objects are deselected 91 Diagnostic mode Transfer to test plan Click on this button to transfer the diagnostic objects for the selected customer codes TPI to the test plan calculation Customer codes TPI already transferred to the test plan and their diagnostic objects are greyed out in the list view They cannot be transferred to the test plan again Cancel No diagnostic objects are transferred and the dialogue box is closed Diagnostic objects are only displayed for marked customer codes TPI x Transfer diagnostic objects to test plan Customer codes Engine gt Engine operation dimensional accuracy Electrical power electric system data transfer Power supply gt electrics Air conditioning gt Heating cooling functionality Diagnostic objects for selected customer codes Close Figure 6 62 Deselected customer code No customer code is selected in the figure above which is why no diagnostic objects are displayed in the list at the bottom Close The dialogue box is closed 2 Note Test programs added to the test plan as the result of a new assessment by diagnostic objects added can only be removed on the Test plan tab c gt Reference See also chapter Using GFF For selected customer codes you can call the overall view using the context menu and the right mouse button 92 Diagnostic mode
203. ile 240 240 1 240 240 OSZE Ot ROVOOGEO Sem en a a E N 241 LOD TS pec al mo dn a res ee ci 242 242 242 2 B ReyDoard lay OULS a a S AA 243 Len 243 1 244 102 35 Chinese SMPN EG u et Henne te 244 245 1 245 10 23 0 nasi ISA ee a E A A 246 IOa OO CEO a EO EO a EN A 247 Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service User Manual O 0 0 PI SL se EE 247 248 L000 TOC oe One ee a 249 250 2 251 251 10 253 1225 lan esse nee 251 hs 2 Katakana oe ne da E E NA 232 1 252 1023 13 1 Enelishesa ne et E een ie 232 wa 253 LOD SoA ClO allan Messen a dd 253 02 SLS DUE a EE AE E E 254 1023416 DONS ee oe E dn et 255 1023 17 OT OCS eo a a sa 256 SR 256 1023 19 Russian et ele 257 258 bl IOV I r E 258 2 259 1 200 10 2 3 24 Taiwan a OPOMOlO 2163 u ei a nee 261 261 262 2 203 gt 203 264 Als OT St ton mode zes ana ee ne et 266 11 12 OpeTallon ware ee a Ne RES ee 266 H CMC rd rare a a ee Olt en a a a ede ee a a ee ee 269 4123 Storage 19Callons Area u een ee a 282 PAA SUPPOM area zusenden Re 288 1 123 CSnneclons AEC As errang 293 11562 NV GMMC AON area ae ee ei er de ed a a i 301 12 Add tl0n3 PrOStam tule On euere 303 2 303 12 121 COUT AT 304 1D 2 IACMOSTIC DEL 304 12 lee DIAS WOSTIC SESSIOMN ea as een a a oun eisaualeadees 306 300 ONUR 308 12 14 Homann an on ae 310 PE S E N E EA S A S ASAA 311 TDD Me Sear i nee dd 311 314
204. imer WO infinite time Speedometer Default parameter lt gt 17 DTM ax Figure 6 136 UDS actuator parametrisation The left hand list contains the actuators selected in the previous view The first actuator is selected by default The available parameters are displayed for each actuator selected in the right hand table Depending on the type of parameter its value in the right hand column may be selected from a pop up menu or entered as 153 Diagnostic mode desired If you enter the value freely whether it is valid is checked If problems are detected or f a value is missing the respective parameter is marked in red and the corresponding actuator is displayed in bold red characters Control units P rocess 17 Dash Board UDS ISOTP 3C0920872B 70206 X01 EV_Kombi_UDS_VDD_RMO9 A04040 Results Orders Actuator diagnosis Set parameters Oil pressure indicator lamp Re j LO Control Value On Belt warning indicator lamp Parameters Value Unit LO _Control Timer Fuel gauge Speedometer Rey counter Engine Coolant Temperature ECT Gauge Hot light Test picture in center display Default parameter lt gt 17 DTM p 4 Figure 6 137 UDS actuator diagnosis Parametrisation problems To set all parameters to their corresponding default values click on the Default parameters button Whether values are missing or invalid is checked in this case too and th
205. ing the test plan Adjusting the test plan DISS TPI Figure 1 1 Example of a diagnostic workflow The complete diagnostic workflow is displayed in the example shown above The diagnostic workflow consists of four parts each consisting of the corresponding individual steps In the figure the currently described part is highlighted in red The description of the individual parts with the individual steps is as follows 12 Introduction Diagnostic start up g en the Starting m diagnasis f GMD Var N Selecting an 2 Identificating je Starting f mi order g one control units ay Figure 1 2 Example of part of a workflow with individual steps In this example the individual steps are displayed in their practical chronological order and the currently described individual step is displayed in red 2 Note Please read this manual carefully before you use Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service for the first time It is imperative that you observe the warnings and notes with regard to using Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service and the vehicle during diagnostic and repair work Up to dateness of the figures All figures are up to date even if they have an older version number 1 2 Structure of the manual To ensure quick access to the information you require we recommend that you use the table of contents in the PDF document If the manual is a
206. ing the mouse and keyboard and or using the touchscreen Larger buttons make it easier to operate the program using the tester and the touchscreen 5 1 1 Touchscreen A touchscreen is a sensor screen available on some diagnostic units Here you press the buttons with your fingers and or a touch pen instead of using the mouse and keyboard D Note The right mouse button is not used for the touchscreen Menus and buttons that would otherwise be accessed using the right mouse button are displayed on the touchscreen by keeping the left mouse button pressed for approx 1 second 5 1 2 Mouse and keyboard The program can also be used with the mouse To do this move the cursor over the desired button and left click for confirmation The menus and buttons of the context menu that would otherwise be accessed with the right mouse button are displayed by keeping the left mouse button pressed for approx 1 second The keyboard is required to enter values in test programs or guided functions if this is required by test steps The VIN is also entered manually using the keyboard 47 Chapter 6 Diagnostic mode This chapter deals with the scope of functions in diagnostic mode 6 1 Diagnostic workflow The typical workflow of a diagnostic session with Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is described in the following chapters A diagnostic session is characterised by the sections Diagnostic start up Test plan and special funct
207. into the control unit click on the Apply button Reset all Restores the values of all adaptation functions saved to the control unit before the last write operation Clicking on the button displays the values last used in the Input column To write the restored values into the control unit click on the Apply button Apply After changing the values of all desired adaptation functions you can save them by clicking on the Apply button Then the user needs to confirm this Figure 6 103 Confirmation prompt before performing the adaptation Yes The new adaptation values are written 125 Diagnostic mode No The adaptation values are not written into the control unit Reset control units This option is only active for control units that support this function If the tick is set the control unit is reset after writing the adaptation values Before saving the values the validity of the parameter values entered freely 1s checked If this check is not suc cessful the values are not written into the control unit and an error message informs the user of the cause ODSso22E Infrastructure Vehicle Eculam An error occurred during communication with the vehicle The entered value is outside the valid value range Figure 6 104 Error message in the event of an invalid adaptation value If the new values were saved successfully they are displayed in the Current value column 6 6 2 2 Coding Depending on whether coding is to
208. ints can be created using a coding wizard These complaints can be used to change the test plan for guided fault finding DISS BA Customer Ya Customer code TPI vor SS el 123496 Engine Induction system charging systems vacuum systems 4567 89 2 123450 Electrical power electric system data transfer Power supply electrics 186217 manual Air conditioning Heating cooling functionality Figure 6 55 Table with DISS complaints The table list of DISS complaints has four columns 1 DISS BA ID That is the identification number of a complaint 2 Customer live statement That is the complaint in the customer s words as entered during placement of the order 3 Customer code That is the customer live statement in text form 87 Diagnostic mode 4 TPI from DISS The number of the TPI assigned to the complaint from the DISS system There are two possible categories of DISS complaints 1 Complaints from the DISS system These complaints display all DISS information from the currently used order from ElsaPro and are called automatically in the background when the order is selected at the start of the diagnostic session To list the complaints from DISS an online connection with login to the Group systems is necessary 2 Manual complaints These complaints are entered manually and displayed in the customer code column The DISS BA ID is always manual the two remaining columns are without data These complaints are
209. inuten 40 Sekunden Figure 3 17 Display of the PostSetup data Before the actual data installation is started the maximum download size of the data to be installed and the download time for installation via internet according to the type of connection are displayed This button can be used to navigate backwards step by step in the PostSetup 29 Installation PoskSetup Software Update TEEPE ELLE LLL de volkswaden odis vaudas E 4 9 29 Jar 6840 bytes Aktiresberil Modem 56k 208 Minuten 40 Sekunden Figure 3 18 Installation of the PostSetup data The diagnostic data and vehicle projects of the brands entered in the licence certificate and the help files are installed according to the language selection made at the start of the installation The corresponding data packages and the installation progress are displayed in the Progress dialogue When this installation has been completed successfully you can use Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service for your work 2 Note It is possible to cancel the installation of the language dependent diagnostic data vehicle projects and help files when Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is started for the first time However in that case you cannot use the application for your work If shared network drives are to be configured for using several Offboard Diagnostic Information System Ser vice test devices observe the Microsoft Windows documentation f
210. ions Using fault finding GFF and Ending diagnosis a a A Testplan and oe ai rial Using Ending fo See functions BES y f Ben J f f Staring Executing ae Ending i diagnosis start modules tests GFF aT Executing GMD traversion tests m Loginto 7 a Den the fi j Ps Group 4 Systems ast plan Adjusting the Selecing an test plan order f J DSS TFI _ F _ identificating control units i nt 3 starting GFF Figure 6 1 Diagnostic start up workflow 2 In the Diagnostic start up section the vehicle is connected and identified GMD login to the Group systems is performed a corresponding order is selected from ElsaPro the vehicle s control units are identified and finally the start of GFF is initiated 2 In the Test plan and special functions section start modules and traversion tests are executed the test plan is calculated automatically and adjusted manually via DISS and TPI if necessary At the end of this section the test plan and special functions are available for guided fault finding 2 The focus of the Using GFF section is on the execution of GFF tests 2 In the End diagnosis section a diagnostic session is completed by erasing the event memory executing end modules and the option of giving feedback In addition to this typical course of a diagnostic s
211. irectory Use global configuration This option is for setting whether the test device is to apply the global configuration settings if a corresponding file is specified in the directory described above Change global configuration Select whether the configuration data of the test device is to be written back to the global configuration directory under here That overwrites the global configuration data reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 2 Note If no global configuration directory is selected Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service uses the local configuration settings 279 Administration mode 2 General GFF sequence The list of individual test steps on the left in the sequence view of guided fault finding can be enabled or disabled General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand design Details on GFF sequence Test steps Language Update Always display test steps U System logging Licence information System environment Figure 11 12 View of GFF sequence details Always display test steps If this setting is activated the test steps are displayed Otherwise the list of test steps is deactivated Reset
212. irm this message by clicking on Yes for the page to be displayed correctly If you clicked on No here restart Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service and click on Yes to correctly display the page 349 Chapter 15 Index Index A Access authorisation 159 Actions tab 190 Actual installation 68 Actual no 73 82 Actuator code 150 Actuator diagnosis 150 Adaptation 121 Admin 42 Administration 266 Anti virus protection 291 B Basic characteristics flashing 171 Basic vehicle characteristics 56 Binary code 129 Block diagram 73 Bluetooth interface 22 Brand design 269 Brand licensed 278 Browser error message 349 C Cancel diagnosis 52 Certificate 23 Change diagnostic hardware 51 Change display format 73 Change sort preference 72 Change system language 270 Circuit diagrams 193 Client area 41 41 Code 41 Coded 69 Coding 126 Coding status 69 Coding wizard 88 Complaints 86 Component selection 108 Conduction of overall tests 96 Control unit correctly installed 70 Control unit specific functions 121 Control units 71 79 117 Control units list 71 Copy diagnostic protocol 304 Creating a test plan 86 Current measurement Clamp on ammeter 209 URDI measuring lead 204 Customer code 86 350 Index Cycle update 33 D Data menu 43 Database storage location 282 Dealer 41 Dealer number 41 Dealer type 278 Default setting
213. is discarded Authorised dealers may repeat login at all times This button is available in all views of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service that obtain data from Group systems It can be used to repeat login at all times After login access to services such as ElsaPro CarPort DISS etc will be possible in the subsequent course of the diagnostic session 2 Note An unaffiliated market participant must login to the Group systems online at the start of a diagnostic or flash session to enable diagnostic or flash start up If login is cancelled Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service returns to the start screen After login Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service displays the remaining duration of validity of the diagnostic flat rate in days and hours in the Information area of the user interface under Time remaining In addition the orders and vehicle history are not available to the unaffiliated market participant 6 2 4 Selecting an order After login to the Group systems an order is selected for the diagnostic session It is also possible to work without an order which is decided in this section Diagnostic Start up k Starting diagnosis Executing the Ga Selecting an identificating N Starting GMD Systems fi f control units GFF j Figure 6 20 Select order section Diagnostic start up The same procedure is used to start up a fla
214. istration mode 11 5 Connections area 2 Connections brand settings How each Group brand connects to the Group system via CPN or Internet can be set here Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action 7 General Brand settings Details on Brand settings Brand to be configured Group system GFF Group system ElsaPro Selection Volkswagen 1 Group system eShop Connection types Group system Carport Group system DISS for Volkswagen Passenger Cars CPN v CPN Mirror server 2 Internet Reset Figure 11 22 Brand settings view Brand to be configured The brand can be selected from the Selection list for which the settings are to be defined in the following views on the Connection types tab Only the brands licensed for the tester are available in this brand selection Connection types Whether a Group system service is called via a CPN or an Internet address is selected here This setting can be defined individually for each brand Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 293 Administration mode 2 Note The predefined addresses for Group system services may only be changed after consulting the support team of the corresponding brand Ot
215. ited extent Order processing not possible Diagnostic session Attach current diagnostic session Insert screenshot Figure 12 30 The Send support request window Insert screenshot This button can be used to send a screenshot of the error message or problem with the support request Clicking on the Insert screenshot button inserts a screenshot of the current view of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service in the text box Cancel To cancel the support request without sending it click on the Cancel button The window is closed Cancellation of the support request needs to be confirmed in a query 325 Additional program functions Question amp Do you realy want to end the support request Yes The support request is cancelled and exited No The support request is not cancelled Send Click on this button to send the support request This button is only enabled if the mail address in the hotline section s valid The online help for feedback operation s available v a this button The Information on the feedback sender section is at the top left of the support window Information about feedback sender First name E mail Last name Telephone Manufacturer WV i Figure 12 31 Information on the feedback sender The First name Surname E mail address and Telephone no are entered here If information on the feedback sender is entered in the administration under Support are
216. iten durchf hren A ACHTUNG Texte mit diesem Symbol enthalten Informationen bez glich Ihrer Sicherheit und wie Sie das Risiko von schweren und t dlichen Verletzungen vermindern k nnen Das Symbol ACHTUNG A unterliegt besonderer Beachtung Stellen Sie sicher diese Texte grunds tzlich zu lesen Vorsicht Texte mit diesem Symbol enthalten Informationen wie Sie Sch den am Fahrzeug vermeiden Ein Vorsicht Symbol informiert Sie dar ber dass ein Nichtbeachten einer Information zu Sch den am Fahrzeug f hren kann z B Steven Sie sicher die Z ndung auszuschalten bevor die Batterie angeklemmt wird andemfails kann das Motorsteuerger t besch digt werden Hinweis Texte mit diesem Symbol enthalten zus tzliche n tzliche Informationen Ein Hinweis Symbol enthalt dar ber hinaus spezielle und weitere Hinweise zu Reparaturma nahmen und damit verbundenen Informationen Um die allgemein g ltigen ACHTUNG Hinweis und Vorsicht Texte zu lesen klicken Sie innerhalb der Anwendung in der Men zeile im Bereich infos auf die jeweiligen Schaltfl chen Achtung Vorsicht oder Hinweis Der gew hlte Eintrag wird angezeigt Allgemeine Sicherheitsvorschriften bei Arbeiten an Airbag Gurtstraffer und Batterieabtrennungseinheiten pyrotechnische Bauteile Pyrotechnische Bauteile enthalten immer einen Treibstoff bei dessen Abbrand ein Gas erzeugt wird In manchen Ausf hrungsformen steht f r diese Gaserzeugung zus tzlich ei
217. k is stored temporarily and locally QUEUE setting If you switch from the QUEUE setting to the Mail setting Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service sends the temporarily saved e mails with the next feedback e Mail server The name of the mail server e Mail server port The port of the mail server e Mail server login Set a tick here if login to the mail server is requested e Login name The login name for the mailbox entered here is automatically entered in the Login window during login e Password usage 290 Administration mode The password is saved until Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is closed If the password is to apply until Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is closed on sending the message a login window opens in which the login name and the password are entered by default The password only applies to the next feedback transmission Secure connection If the mail server requests SSL or TSL a tick must be set here E mail transmission address You can enter your own sender address here That is necessary if the support team is to send a reply to this address reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button If the e mail is sent via the mail server of a provider the provi
218. kswagen Phaeton Fahrer und Beifahrerairbag Volkswagen Touareg Beifahrerairbag Volkswagen New Beetle Limousine Beifahrerairbag Volkswagen New Beetle Cabriolet Beifahrerairbag Bei allen anderen Fahrzeugen wird die 2 Stufe immer gez ndet Erkennungsmerkmale der 2 stufigen Airbageinheiten 1 Kontrollleuchte PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF im Spiegelfu vom Innenspiegel 2 Warnaufkleber auf der Innenseite der Sonnenblende Bei den genannten Fahrzeugen mit 2 stufigen Airbageinheiten sind die folgenden Hinweise zus tzlich zu beachten A ACHTUNG Bei Airbageinheiten mit gez ndeter 1 Stufe ist nicht sichergestellt dass die 2 Stufe gez ndet wurde Airbageinheiten bei denen nur die 1 Stufe gez ndet wurde k nnen durch Z ndung der 2 Stufe schwere Verletzungen verursachen Eine M glichkeit zu pr fen ob die 2 Stufe gez ndet wurde steht momentan nicht zur Verf gung Aus diesem Grund sind die genannten Airbageinheiten entsprechend der nationalen Gesetzgebung in der Originalverpackung einer ordnungsgem en Verwertung zuzuf hren Spezielle Hinweise f r Kopfairbagmodule Ausgebaute Kopfairbagmodule im Transportbeh lter oder auf einer sauberen geraden Fl che mit untergelegter Decke ablegen Figure 12 39 Window with warnings notes part 2 331 Additional program functions kaj Warnungen Hinweise ER yee ee CO or ee a a 2 Warnaufkleber auf der Innenseite der Sonnenblende Bei den genannten Fahrzeug
219. l includes a list of control units with the corresponding event memory entries DISS codes and manually created text Current measurement during which the tester is integrated directly in the cir cuit like an ammeter The opposite inductive current measurement via clamp on ammeter clamped on to the cable The DISS system Direct Information System Service is used to record vehi cle complaints and to support the service core process 356 DTC DTS Softing ECU Self diagnosis Own test plan End module Event code Event location Event memory Rules based on experience eShop Vehicle identification Feedback Error classification Flash data Flash memory Function Function test Glossary Recording of complaints Reporting of existing complaints Diagnostic Trouble Code An event memory entry consisting of fault location fault types and possibly ambient conditions Diagnostic Tool Set software for creating diagnostic applications Electronic Control Unit Vehicle systems are capable of self diagnosis That means they have methods for constantly checking their own functions as well as sensors and actuators connected A fault normally results in the entry of a fault code in the event memory of the vehicle system The tester has knowledge of all faults in its knowledge base so that after reading out the event memory it can assign the fault code to a fault type and location and thus derive a test propo
220. lable to the unaffiliated market participant gt Reference See also chapter Login to Group systems 173 Flash mode 7 4 Selecting orders After login to the Group systems an order is selected for the flash session or created manually Flashing identificating J eontrol units Starting Identificating flash session f a vehicle Figure 7 10 Select order section If login is successful Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service selects the order data for the current vehicle from ElsaPro Flashing Orders No orders found Order Registration Date Text 1234 Standard job for working with manual job number Figure 7 11 Selecting an order for flashing 174 Flash mode Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches to the Orders tab and displays a list of all orders available for the vehicle The order number is displayed under Order the current status in the SCP process under SCP status and the vehicle s licence plate number the date of the order and a descriptive text on the order are displayed in the order list The meaning of the SCP status numbers is listed in the following table Table 7 1 Meaning of the SCP status numbers If an order from ElsaPro is to be used the desired order needs to be marked for this Select order Click on this button to continue flash start up with the order from ElsaPro However it is also possible
221. le Documents Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Vehicle PR no suche Erweiterte Suche Stromlaufpl ne a Golf Bora Stromlaufplan Nr 82 2 or 4 Steuerger t f r Airbag Wickelfeder f r 5 Stromlaufpl ne amp Airbag Ziinder fiir Airbag vorn ie Cheats Crashsensoren f r Seitenairbag D Z ndanlass Schalter 2 m Fehlersuchprogramme F138 Wickelfeder f r Airbag und R ckstellring 43 Stromlaufpl ne mit Schleifring 0 1 91 Turbodieselmotor 66 kW Motorkennbuchstaben AL G179 Crashsensor f r Seitenairbag Fahrerseite 34 Airbagsysteme Fahrer und Beifahrerairbag Gurtstraffer G180 Crashsensor f r Seitenairbag Seite 2 Steuerger t f r Airbag Wickelfeder f r Beifahrerseite B Seite 3 Steuerger t f r Airbag Z nder f r Seitenairbag H Signalhombet tigung B Seite 4 Steuerger t f r Airbag Crashsensor f r Seitena ai a A Atlan Cader FE 5 Seite 5 Steuerger t f r Airbag Kontrollampe f r Airbag aan gt Allradantrieb 4 Motion mit Benzinmotor ab Mai 1999 N95 Ziinder fiir Airbag Fahrerseite 9 Allradantrieb 4 Motion mit Dieselmotor ab Mai 1999 nu N131 Z nder 1 f r Airbag Beifahrerseite 9 Anh ngerbetrieb Limousine ab Mai 1999 wi T5b Steckverbindung 5fach 49 Anhangerbetrieb ab Mai 1999 o T5j Steckverbindung 5fach 6 Antiblockiersystem ABS mit elektronischer Differentialspt ar T75 Steckverbindung 75fach 4 Antiblockiersystem ABS mit elektronischer Differenti
222. lick on this button to restart the previously conducted and successful test Depending on the type of test this can be done with different parameters or selection options No Click on this button to perform the previously conducted and successful test again with the same parameters 107 Diagnostic mode 6 4 2 Selecting components The Test plan tab gives you the option of adding further tests on components of the vehicle or documents to the test plan To do this on the Test plan tab click on the Select own test button The Overview of tests window appears displaying the vehicle s diagnostic objects The desired test or document can be selected here via a tree structure E Overview of the tests Powertrain Repair Group 01 10 to 26 25 to 39 Suspension Repair Group 01 40 to 49 Brake system 01 On Board Diagnostic capable systems Mark 60 Mark 70 Anti lock brake system ABSTEDLIASRIESP Mark 60 Electrical components Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Button E492 F Brake Light Switch Parking Brake Warning Light Switch FY Ir Attach to test plan Figure 6 80 Window for selecting tests Click on the plus sign to navigate down through the structure In addition to components documents can also be added to the test plan Selected documents are executed like test programs Add to the test plan After selecting the test required for a component or document click on this button to apply
223. llowing functions can be selected depending on the measuring function e Freeze frame Freezes the current display Cyclic repetition of the measurement pauses and the last measured value is displayed statically To resume cyclic measurement click on the button again For the remote con trolled operation of the Freeze frame function use the remote control button on the measuring probe of the U R D and DSO measuring lead red measuring lead 198 Test Instruments mode Freeze frame Minimum maximum can be used to configure user defined settings for the measuring leads connected via the device sockets Measuring functions can be set measurements can be carried out and test results can be read Indication of the limit values The current minimum and maximum measured values after activation of the function are indicated in the bar graph by means of vertical markers In addition the limit values are displayed numerically below the markers If the function is deactivated the limit values measured so far are discarded Minimum maximum Calibrate Manual start of the calibration of a measuring lead Always calibrate manually when replacing a measuring lead or using a measuring lead in a different measurement position or in case of large fluctuations in temperature With the measuring functions Resistance URDI measuring range lt 100 ohm Current URDI and Continuity test URDI calibration is performed automatically when the functio
224. m Anschlie en der Gurtstraffereinheit m ssen alle mechanischen Teile auch die des Dreipunkt Sicherheitsgurts korrekt befestigt sein Sollte das Anschlie en der Gurtstraffereinheit aufgrund fehlender Platzverhaltnisse nicht m glich sein muss das Gurtband vor dem Anschlie en vollst ndig aufgerollt sein In diesem Fall besteht kein erh htes Sicherheitsrisiko wenn die weiteren Sicherheitshinweise beachtet und eingehalten werden Hierzu z hlen im Hauptaugenmerk das Abklemmen der Batterie und das elektrostatische Entladen des Monteurs vor dem Anschlie en der Gurtstraffereinheit Je nach Crash kann es sein dass der Gurtstraffer gez ndet wurde der Gurtkraftbegrenzer jedoch NICHT gez ndet wurde Diese Bauteile sind zu behandeln wie nicht gez ndete Bauteile Spezielle Hinweise f r Batterieabtrennungseinheiten volkswagen Phaeton mit Zwei Batterie Konzept Reihenfolge beim Abklemmen der Batterien Vorsicht Wird die Reihenfolge nicht eingehalten kann die pyrotechnische Batterieabtrennung ausgel st und die elektrische Fahrzeugausstattung besch digt werden 1 Klemmen Sie zuerst die Batterie im Kofferraum rechts ab 2 Klemmen Sie danach die Batterie im Kofferraum links ab Lagerung Transport und Entsorgung von Airbag Gurtstraffer und Batterieabtrennungseinheiten pyrotechnische Bauteile Die Lagerung unterliegt der jeweiligen nationalen Gesetzgebung Der Transport unterliegt nationalen und internationalen Rechtsvorschriften in de
225. manual order number A marked order with order number can be selected from ElsaPro by clicking on the Select order button Without a connection to the Group systems only a standard order is created for working with manual order number It is possible to assign a number to this order and select it for the diagnostic session 65 Diagnostic mode Control units Orders No orders found Order Registration Date Text Standard job for working with manual job number Enter order no Order no gt Figure 6 26 Entering the order number If a manual order number is to be assigned the Standard order for working with manual order number needs to be selected from the list by left clicking on it Enter no Click on this button to open a window for entering the order number which may consist of a combi nation of letters and numbers as desired Apply The order number is used Cancel No order number is assigned Without order Diagnostic start up is continued without an order 66 Diagnostic mode Orders Control units No orders found Order Registration Date Text Standard job for working with manual job number Figure 6 27 Selecting Work without order To do this click on the Without order button 2 Note Only orders with order numbers can be selected for a diagnostic session The selected order is valid for the entire diagnostic session and ca
226. mation System Service lists the available flash programs on the Special functions tab Flashing Orders Special functions Process Tests for the complete vehicle SYS 1_0807_11_SERVICE42_SG_CODIEREN 11 Zs Perform test Show documents Figure 7 15 Available flash programs 177 Flash mode The desired flash program is marked by clicking on it Perform test The selected flash program is started For this Offboard Diagnostic Information System Ser vice switches to the Process tab Show documents The button can be used to display corresponding documents if available For this Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches in Info mode to the Documents tab Flash programs are executed in the same way as GFF diagnostic programs Reference See also chapter Using GFF Flash sessions can be saved re opened and continued just like diagnostic sessions The application automatically detects whether a diagnostic or flash session is to be saved or resumed gt Reference For more details on saving flash sessions see the Data chapter 7 7 Ending a flash session If the desired flash programs have been completed the flash session can be ended Ending flashing Figure 7 16 End flashing section To end the flash session you need to switch to the Flash tab 178 Flash mode 1 Modes Orders Special functions Process Flashing SY T
227. measured value display Measured value name The name of the measured value block Value The measured value Refresh MY in cycles a Sec Select measured values Updating the measured values can be controlled using the control elements in the Update area In the standard case the measured values are updated in cycles as soon as possible You can set the desired update interval in seconds in a text field Update in cycles can be deactivated by deselecting the in cycles checkbox If this option is deselected you can update the measured values specifically using the now button You can use the Select measured values button to return to the initial view and then change the selection of the measured values to be displayed 149 Diagnostic mode 6 6 2 7 Actuator diagnosis Configuration of the actuator diagnosis and of the measured values to be displayed deviates depending on whether the function is executed on control units with KWP protocol or with UDS protocol 6 6 2 7 1 Actuator diagnosis on KWP control units Results Orders Control units Process 17 Dash Board KAP 2000 7 T F207 30920871 X 716147007 Actuator diagnosisStatus Actuator diagnosis not started Measured values Measured value name Value nit Sequential Actuator code 17 SGT p 4 Figure 6 132 KWP actuator diagnosis Measured value name The name of the measured value Value The measured value Unit The unit of the meas
228. measured values from different blocks can be configured for the display Example Input 8 Apply Applied selection 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 e All measured values of the block are applied Input 1 2 gt Apply gt Applied selection 1 2 e Only the measured value at the selected position is applied Clicking on the required measured value block in one of the two lists enables the buttons for moving Moves the selected measured value blocks into the left hand list gt Moves the selected measured value blocks into the right hand list amp Moves all measured value blocks into the left hand list W Moves all measured value blocks into the right hand list The list of selected measured value blocks can be sorted P Moves the selected entry up one position Y Moves the selected entry down one position These buttons can be used in the same way for UDS control units after selecting the measured value designators as described above Clicking on the Display measured value button displays the measured values for the measured value blocks in the right hand table in the results view At the same time the current measured values are read out and displayed in a table 148 Diagnostic mode Results Orders Control units Pracess 09 Central Electrics KYVP2000 TP20 sC0g3 0494F r 20007 HS1 Measured value display Measured value name Value 1 0 96 ee J gt J 1 4 J MiS Figure 6 131 KWP
229. menu of the standard functions gt gt Extras a Searching CY vol aft Test drive Figure 12 9 Contents of the Extras menu e Search function Find e Vehicle Communication Interface VCI e Test drive 12 2 1 Search Search Or S hi 1 Bra The search function is opened using the Find button The magnifying glass symbol can also be used to open the search function from the Overview of tests Reference See also Component selection chapter After clicking on the button or magnifying glass symbol the search dialogue appears which is empty on opening it for the first time during a diagnostic session When opened the next time the last search result s displayed by default 311 Additional program functions eS Find J EX Search terms air en Object 2 Test Special function Guided funct MI Diagnostic object Document Search results Object ty Source Figure 12 10 Dialogue for the search function Osearch terms One or more search terms can be entered in this text field Several search terms need to be separated by commas Oobdject types The search can be limited to specific types here such as test programs documents diagnostic objects special functions and guided functions At least one object type must be selected gt Reference See also chapters Using GFF Documents DISS TPI Test plan and special functions
230. ms in the online help After entering the search term click on Go to start the search You can use links and the navigation bar to move within the right hand window with the help texts 323 Additional program functions Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service User Manual co o gt fey ti rc O Chapter 4 Update Chapter 4 Update Regular software and data updates are available for Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service The update cycle and the access data required for automatic updates can be configured in Admm mode Reference See also Administration chapter General area hind Connechons area Each time the program is started the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater searches for updates in the start configuration of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service ey Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater E Update Enter configuration data URL http 0 112 198 71 81 day Select local directory Username Fassword Figure 12 28 Navigation in the online help To navigate in the help texts displayed in the area on the right use the links shown in blue and underlined The links are always above and below a chapter or sub chapter and the text also includes references that work as direct links to the specified chapters Back This link is used to scroll back a page Next This link is used to scroll to the next page Text reference This link takes you to the corr
231. n SMS gt Kurzmitteilung SMS verfassen manuell Karosserie gt Vorbau Hinterbau gt Optik Oberfl che 186118 manuell Pr fplan erweitern TP anzeigen Figure 6 58 View of the TPI tab The TPI tab shows the same table list with complaints as the DISS tab with the additional TPI manually in which the manually entered TPI is displayed Extend test plan Opens the Transfer diagnostic objects to test plan window Display TPI Opens the Display TPI window in the TPI numbers tab view The TPI for the selected complaint is displayed S TPH anzeigen ole TPrListe TPI Nummer i TPI Nummer 2006837 2 Kundenaussage Werkstattfeststellung Kratzer in der Glasoberflache der Fahrzeugverglasung Technischer Hintergrund Diverse Ursachen siehe KD L sung Done Schlie en Figure 6 59 Displaying a selected TPI number Further TPI can be accessed from ElsaPro and viewed Enter the desired TPI number in the TPI number field for this and press the Display button 90 Diagnostic mode TFI from DISS TFI manual S456 FT dimensional accuracy y 245678713 Joh 128 ab 23 Figure 6 60 Entering TPI manually Adding TPI manually The Display TPI dialogue box provides the option of using the TPI number field to enter TPI numbers in the TPI manually column on the TPI list and TPI number tabs For this enter the TPI number in the field and click on the Apply button to
232. n a block at the top and all global documents in a block at the bottom Both blocks are clearly separated from each other Documents with the same name are numbered in both blocks Cy Reference More explanations on documents are available in the Documents chapter 105 Diagnostic mode Process Connection to Central control module for comfort s Rare Evaluating DTC memory Information for CAN Bus in powertrain wiring harness Preparation steps Preparation steps x VAUDES_HINWEIS General notes Preallocation control modules Generally fhe communication on fhe CAN Bus Is started with ignifion on Preallocation control modules However Ibis continued contro module dependently for a specified time Preallocation for evaluating the FSP after ignition off To ensure proper communication the battery voltage should be at least 9 Preallocation for evaluating the FSP Volts Selection model Not every CAN Bus malfunction must be attributed fo a faulty CAN Bus the wp control module itself can also be the cause especially in case of Connector names for GolffRabbiGq malfunction entry implausible message from contro module xy and Please check DIC memory of contro module xy End modules x YAUDES_HINWEIS Evaluating DTC memory Notes for DTC memory entries Powertrain Data Bus malfunctioning Is set by a control module in DIC memory I if is unable fo send ifs messages due to a malfu
233. n gespeichertes Druckgas zur Verf gung Dieses Druckgas wird in einem unter hohem Druck stehenden Druckgasbeh lter bevorratet Die Z ndung pyrotechnischer Bauteile erfolgt Uber elektrische mechanische Anzunder Pr f Montage und Instandsetzungsarbeiten d rfen nur von geschulten Personal durchgef hrt werden F r Airbageinheiten gibt es keine Wechselintervalle Keinesfalls mit Pr flampe Voltmeter oder Ohmmeter pr fen Figure 12 38 Window with warnings notes part 1 330 Additional program functions Warnungen Hinweise ER Keinestalls mit Pruflampe Voltmeter oder Ohmmeter pruten a Pyrotechnische Bauteile d rfen nur im eingebauten Zustand und mit vom Hersteller frei gegebenen Fahrzeugdiagnose Mess und Informationssystemen gepr ft werden Bei Arbeiten an pyrotechnischen Bauteilen und am Steuerger t f r Airbag J234 muss das Masseband der Batterie bei eingeschalteter Z ndung abgeklemmt werden Anschlie end Minuspol abdecken Nach dem Abklemmen der Batterie ist eine Wartezeit von 10 Sekunden erforderlich Das Anklemmen der Batterie muss bei EINGESCHALTETER Z ndung erfolgen Hierbei darf sich keine Person im Innenraum des Fahrzeugs aufhalten Ausnahme Fahrzeuge mit Batterie im Fahrgastinnenraum Halten sich Sie sich hierbei nicht im Wirkungsbereich der Airbags und der Sicherheitsgurte auf Nach dem Ber hren von gez ndeten pyrotechnischen Bauteilen des R ckhaltesystems H nde waschen Pyrotechnische Baut
234. n is started Diagnostic measured values Shows measured values and measured value blocks read out of a control unit in cycles These must first be loaded in diagnostic mode and transferred for test instruments mode The button is only visible if measured value blocks have already been loaded in diagnostic mode Measured values diagnosis gt Reference See also chapter Applying measured values from diagnostic mode Owote To trigger the Freeze frame function by remote control use the remote control button on the measuring probe of the URDI and DSO measuring lead 2 The operating area of the multimeter client area is divided into two function blocks Figure 9 3 Structure of the operating area of the multimeter client area runction block 1 199 Test Instruments mode Function block 1 consists of all measuring functions and parameters of the URDI measuring system The buttons and the corresponding indication of measured values are shown in yellow font The following measuring functions are available e Voltage URDI Measurement of AC and DC voltage Reference See also chapter Voltage measurement URDI e Current URDI Measuring direct and alternating current Reference See also chapter Current measurement URDI Resistance URDI Measuring ohmic resistance Reference See also chapter Resistance measurement URDI e Diode test URDI Testing diode polarity and function Reference
235. name pattern VIN _ YYYY 96MM SDD _ hh mm ss ses Reset Figure 11 15 Diagnostic session storage location Select This button can be used to select the specified storage location for the diagnostic session data under Diag nostic session details in the Target directory field During a session the Windows Save dialogue can be used to save the sess on data to a different location File name pattern A name pattern for the diagnostic session can be selected in the text field In the example displayed the file name consists of the VIN the date with four digit year two digit month and day and the exact time e g VIN_2009 08 12_16 27 15 ses 283 Administration mode These specifications are possible e YYYYY for the current year e MMMH for the current month e DD for the current day of the month e hh for the current hour of the day in 24 h format e Yomm for the current minute of the hour e ss for the current second of the minute e VIN Vehicle Identification Number chassis number of the diagnosed vehicle e Freely definable text that may include the following characters e Letters in upper and lower case e All digits from 0 9 e And the following characters _ underline minus dot Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To s
236. nce See also Current view 187 Info mode 8 1 1 Documents in the GFF The test programs for guided fault finding include numerous different documents These documents are available in Diagnostic mode either in the test plan view or in the test programs themselves Cy Reference See also chapter Using GFF i u z er u gm Control units Orders DISS Test plan Process Special functions Tests in current test plan Status Tests sorted by their potential success 5 Ignition key Drivetrain data BUS Fault in engine control module BFS_53 1314 13 Engine control module ECM Please read DTC Intermittent Con Mod J540 for vehicle type incorrect 1 7 Driver s Window Regulator Motor W147 5 Thermal protection central locking S IGO1_46_3C 1_0804_11_MSG 11 Perform test Select own test Figure 8 11 Displaying the documents for a test plan Documents If you click on this button on the Test plan tab in Diagnostic mode a context menu appears from which you can select whether documents are to be displayed for the test plan or for a test program Documents for the test program Documents for the test plan All documents for diagnostic objects taken into account in the test plan are provided in a tree structure Documents for the test program All documents for diagnostic objects taken into account in the test program selected are provided in a tree structure 188
237. nction Control module xy no communication Is set by a control module in DTC memory if itis unable fo receive complete messages from other control modules due to a malfunction Missing message from contro module xy Same meaning as malfunction antng Confral module xv na lt gt se y gt a g 4 HK gt gt 2 Al Figure 6 78 Exiting the document view The document is displayed in the display and message window of the Process view To return to the test program s test step from the document view and continue the test click on this button After completing the test program click on the Done Continue button to finish the test Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service switches back to the table view of the Test plan tab and you can continue with the next tests 106 Diagnostic mode 6 4 1 Test verification A test program can be executed several times by selecting it and clicking on the Perform test button to restart it If the test program has been run once successfully green tick in the test plan view a message appears asking whether verification is to be performed Verification mode allows other entries to be tried out than in the previous test to be able to check verify the previous result by confirmation or contradiction Program execution The program has already been executed Do you Want to execute it in verification mode nowy Figure 6 79 Verification mode query Yes C
238. nd password are not required for an offline update User name Enter the user name Password Enter the password To access the update server the local administrator needs to be consulted Click on Continue to start connecting Cancel The update is cancelled An update may be imported online as well as offline 33 Update 2 Note If a firewall is active while an update is in progress an error message may appear Access to the application file OffboardDiagLauncher exe must not be blocked Reference See also chapter Additional error messages To perform an update of the operating system of the test device or laptop administration rights are required A progress dialogue displays the progress of connecting to the update site iD O Connect to update site Figure 4 2 Connecting to update site Cancel The update is cancelled The Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater shows the size of the available updates and the corre sponding estimated download times according to the type of network connection as soon as a connection to the update site has been established te Offboard Diagnostic Information System Updater J jol xi Update Software Update One update is available Maximum download size S0000k Byte Download times DSL 1024k 6 minutes 56 seconds DSL 512k 13 minutes 53 seconds ISDN Tred 104 minutes 10 seconds Modem 56k 119 minutes 2 seconds Freyvious C
239. nel The value 1 stands for German and the value 2 for English If the user sets the test value to 2 all messages are shown on the display panel of the instrument cluster in English until a different test value is entered the Reset button is used or a different channel is selected As long as the modified value has not yet been saved to the control unit the user can reset the test value to the initial value by clicking on the Reset button i e to the value in the Old value default value column The test value is also reset if anew channel is selected or on changing or closing the tab If the new value is invalid an error message informs the user of this and the value is not stored in the control unit as the test value Error ODS8022E Infrastructure Vehicle EcuCom An error occurred during communication with the vehicle The entered value is outside the valid value range Figure 6 100 Error message in the event of an invalid adaptation value If the correct test value was determined click on the Apply button to save it to the control unit Only then is the value in the Old value default value column set to the new value After saving the value the Reset button is disabled Both values are also disabled if the value in the Input field and the value in the Old value default value field are identical 123 Diagnostic mode On saving values whether the value to be written is valid is checked like for setting test val
240. nen Verpackung Kennzeichnung Bezettelung und Begleitpapier im Detail geregelt sind Nicht gez ndete pyrotechnische Bauteile sind entsprechend der nationalen Gesetzgebung in der Originalverpackung einer ordnungsgem en Verwertung zuzuf hren Bei Fragen wenden Sie sich bitte an ihren Importeur Nur vollstandig gez ndete pyrotechnische Bauteile d rfen ber den Gewerbem ill entsorgt werden Figure 12 40 Window with warnings notes part 3 OK The window is closed These warnings and notes can be opened at all times via the Info area The following information functions are available in the Info area 332 Additional program functions Info A Figure 12 41 Info area e New features This button is used to open the Release Notes with information on new functions compared to the previous version of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service and on errors rectified The window is automatically displayed during the first start after each new installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service e Versions This button is used to open the Version information window It contains information on the installed versions of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service the diagnostic data the MCD server the PDU API the ECF and the ODX projects e Attention This button is used to open the Warnings notes window with warnings and notes of the Attention category e Caution This button is used to open the War
241. ng are incor Please contact Support rect 339 Error messages 1D ea ON ODS4008E Session with vehicle could not be recovered Please check the connection to the vehicle or contact Support ODS4009E An internal system error occurred The system Please restart the system If this does not rectify might therefore be instable Please send feed the error please contact Support back and contact Support It is recommended to shut down and restart the system ODS4014E Please contact Support ODS4015E Anerror occurred while entering a parameter Please contact Support The entered value cannot be converted to the type of the parameter ODS4016E An error occurred while entering a parameter Please contact Support The type of parameter is not supported ODS4501E Test drive mode could not be activated Please contact Support ODS4502E The licence file cannot be opened or read Test Please contact Support drive mode is not activated ODS4503E The licence file could not be copied Test drive Please contact Support mode is not activated ODS4504E Test drive mode could not be deactivated Please contact Support ODS5S001E Test program or step could not be loaded Please contact Support ODS5002E Connection to test instruments not available Please contact Support ODS5003E An internal fatal test program error has occurred Please contact Support This test will be cancelled Error type
242. ng with manual job number Figure 6 24 Order list view To display order details click on the desired order 64 Diagnostic mode Details Click on this button to display the order details Control units Orders Order 1234 for vehicle 2 SE onen Order type WORKSHOP Name Dr BA Order date 2008 08 22 Address C1 Order status Work processes Location D Pick up date 2008 08 29 Telephone 1234 Order items No Type Text 1 Work Inspektion inkl w m Mob Garantie 2 Work Lenkrad aus u einbauen DISS complaints DISS BA ID Customer live statement Customer code TPI fri 12345 Komische Fahrgerausche Karosserie An und Einbauten T ren gt Rost 45678 12345 SMS geht nicht Information Navigation Kommunikation Unterhaltung Kurzmitteilungen SMS gt Funktionalit t lt gt Display order list Figure 6 25 Order detail view In the Order detail view order such as order type order date order status and collection data customer such as name address city and telephone order items with information on item number type and text and DISS complaints with DISS BA ID customer live statement customer code and TPI from DISS are displayed in three subdivided areas Reference For DISS complaints see also DISS TPI chapter Display order list To return to the order list from the detail view click on this button An order for the diagnostic session can be selected from this list or an order created with
243. nge the sequence within an event memory entry click on the Sort preference button The active sort order is greyed out in the menu IO Priority Frequency counter sporadic static ds ET i rt T gi Figure 6 46 Sorting the event memory list Mileage To sort the contents by kilometres driven in ascending order click on this button Priority This button shows the contents sorted in order of importance Frequency counter Click on this button to sort the contents by the frequency counter how frequently the event was identified 81 Diagnostic mode Status This button is used to sort the contents by the status of the event memory entries sporadic static This button is used to list events entered as sporadic at the top of the list Reference See also chapter Control unit list In the event of a longer click approx one second or right click on a control unit the control unit context menu opens like in the control unit list Control units Orders piss Test plan Process Special functions Event memory Telephone 5N0035730 2410 Telefon 5N0035730 011 Gateway Diagnostic interface for databus 1KO907530L 0052 J533 Gateway HO 1K0907951 HO 1300 4 Control module for navigati TE Sae Test instruments Standard environmental condition Identify control unit 1304 4 Radio No signal communi Read all event memories Guided functions Control
244. nings notes window with warnings and notes of the Caution category e Note This button is used to open the Warnings notes window with warnings and notes of the Note category The Info menu can be used to select the Attention Caution and Note descriptions individually 333 Chapter 13 External verification 2 Note External verification s only available if Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service was purchased in a product version with external verification The External verification application is available on the Verification tab in the Diagnosis view The external verification is for checking editorial objects These editorial objects need to be verified before pro ductive operation on the testers Editorial objects may be elements of the equipment network diagnostic objects additional documents function tests and texts gt Reference See Verification in the extended configuration 334 Chapter 14 Error messages Error messages may occur for a variety of reasons while you are using Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service Error messages contain information that is important for classification and for the subsequent procedure Error x ODS9215E Infrastructure VWV online connection Dealer portal Receiving system for diagnostic log not available The data will be stored temporarily and sent automatically when the Group system is available again and Offboard Diagnostic Information
245. nnel has a default setting to start with and the Default setting button is disabled The second table lists all measured values available for the selected channel Measured value name The name of the measured value Value The value returned by the control unit 138 Diagnostic mode Unit The unit of the measured value First select a channel from the list Then after clicking on the Read measured values button the measured values are read for this channel and displayed in the table During this process no settings are changed in the control unit The Read measured values button is now disabled and the Default setting button is enabled To start the process of defining settings click on the Default setting button Then all measured values displayed are processed one after the other If a different channel is selected during the functional sequence and you click on the Read measured values button the process of defining settings is stopped and measured values are re read Some default setting operations require the user s action If that is the case the required action is displayed in the table of measured values for the currently active measured value Once the action has been performed the process of defining settings is automatically continued When the default settings have been configured the result is displayed in the Default settings for KWP Status field D Example The necessary action apply accelerator pedal
246. nning on one channel the file name and the storage location of the target curve must be defined next Target curve name Invalid name for a target curve RegEx azA 2 a z4 20 9_ Figure 9 22 Recording target curves If measurements are running on both channels you need to choose between the following recording options before entering the file name and storage location Record target curve Figure 9 23 Recording target curves of two channels 232 Test Instruments mode Make the selection by clicking on the appropriate button and then confirming it by clicking on OK Afterwards enter a file name and a directory to save the file as you would for a single channel measurement All settings defined for the channels the trigger the measuring mode the timebase and image position are saved 2 Displaying target curves Click on the Display button to show recorded target curves Display After selecting the directory and target curve file the corresponding target curve is shown in the display area The file name of the target curve is displayed in the centre of the bottom part of the display area The previous target curve file format sk2 is supported as well as the file format sk3 introduced with ODIS If a measurement is running this measurement is stopped and the channels the trigger the measuring mode the timebase and the image position are set in accordance with the target curve The signal cu
247. nnot be changed An order is essential for warranty invoicing The order number is added to the diagnostic protocol Self diagnosis is not available for a diagnostic session with order The selection of the order is thus completed 67 Diagnostic mode 6 2 5 Control unit identification After selecting the order the identification of the control units starts To do this Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service evaluates the gateway installation list first Diagnostic Start up Login ta Group Syslems Selec ng an order Executing the GMD Figure 6 28 Identify control units section If the vehicle is marked in the equipment network for CAN diagnosis the gateway installation list is read with information on the communication protocol the vehicle s target installation the vehicle s actual installation and the current event memory status If a difference between the target installation and the actual installation in the vehicle is identified according to the status information in the gateway installation list Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens a Check installation list window with the control units in the order provided by the gateway This installation list can be sorted by diagnostic address control unit name coding status and installation status in the test window Check installation list x The system detected control units that are not inclu
248. ns all actuators available for the selected control unit This list can be sorted alphabetically by clicking on the column heading The right hand list contains the actuators to be tested It is empty to start with You can select one or more actuators either by clicking on them or using the keyboard The first actuator is selected that starts with the letter entered If the same letter is entered again the next element with this initial letter is selected gt Reference More information on using the keyboard is available in the table of Shortcuts 152 2 Diagnostic mode Clicking on an actuator in one of the two lists enables the buttons for moving Moves the selected actuators into the left hand list gt Moves the selected actuators into the right hand list amp Moves all actuators into the left hand list gt Moves all actuators into the right hand list The list of selected actuators can be sorted P Moves the selected entry up one position Y Moves the selected entry down one position Ep Switches to the next view Parametrisation Parametrisation Results Orders Process 17 Dash Board UDS ISOTP sCog20s72B 0206 401 EY Kombi UDS VDD RMOS 404040 Control units Actuator diagnosis Set parameters Cy PPEFPPFFEPFFEPFPEFFFPPFFPPFPRRFREPESSPPPPPFPEPFFN Parameters Value Unit segment test Eatas i LO Control Value ae Song LO Control T
249. nste A 220 9 18 Paramieti1sal on Of long term measurement nenn 223 9 19 Evaluat na Ion Ssferimmeasur ments ae i a a 225 2 20 Parame misano OF Ne WIG Ser sr en une ae 227 321 ChHent area of The tab Set Curves Tuncton anne ee ie ein 231 ROLE 232 923 Recordings target CULVES Ol TWO Chane Ne 232 924 SNOWINS Tare el INS ur este 233 9 25 Displaying diagnostic measured values on the multimeter pp 251 9 26 Displaying diagnostic measured values on the oscilloscope ppp 237 9 27 Activating expert mode in the target Curves function pp 239 10 1 Title eg 240 LO 22 Rey Board Nay Ok ae gets a ee a en a re Mine Pe a ee teat ee et re 241 10 3 Nomerie DO 241 We 242 1 1 1 Administation WTI OW ices ci tesa een 266 11 2 SCIECUMO the des e Merei ines a tee see 269 Hoe Aan Ula et Ce ee a nea A maw eu aca iees 270 11 4 Additional Windows language support ea Be EHI as 271 2 12 EL 273 274 FES SYSteMICHVILONIDENENVIEW steel else ld dd 276 1 149 Ticente information View 277 11 10 Licence information View Part 2 a Tennessee 277 HT alo ball COMMS ra On VIEW sis ER eins 278 11 12 Wiew OL GEF Sequence ea 280 Ho Detil view Tor Ber al keyboarde er I T 281 11 14 Database dCY nass a aus Ki re le et 282 11215 Diaonostie session Storage IOCAN zn ee 283 ETO las Pas we Winsen een ml A 285 11 17 gt Diasnostie Protocol we 286 ob 288 WIN Oom Mall SEI Ver NICW sen aeg 290 LI 20 Emor message Tor correct Hall Se 292 11 21
250. ntification no WVYANZZ2 1 KZ6VV061146 l Dealer 67890 Engine Fu Order Fe Flashing Modes lt A Test instruments The vehicle is being int 9 Admin Data Extras Help analysed Info v Please wait gt E Analysing VIN z Figure 7 5 Vehicle analysis during flash start up If the vehicle is identified completely i e VIN brand model and model year are unambiguous and familiar vehicle identification is performed fully automatically without displaying a basic vehicle characteristics dialogue 170 Flash mode If automatic vehicle identification fails Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service displays a basic ve hicle characteristics dialogue with information on the VIN manufacturer model and model year Basic vehicle characteristics Vehicle identification automatic manual WIT MANNZZEIKZEINDETT 45 Manufacturer Not translated Volkswagen l Model 7P Touareg 2010 gt B Model year EIER AR nt Figure 7 6 Manual vehicle identification This dialogue can be used for the manual selection of the essential basic vehicle characteristics Apply The selected basic vehicle characteristics are applied and flash start up is continued Cancel Vehicle identification is cancelled gt Reference A detailed description of the basic vehicle characteristics dialogue is available in the Basic characteristics dialogue GMD chapter Note th
251. o reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 298 Administration mode 2 Note Without a correct URL for DISS no complaints can be displayed from the DISS system or ass gned TPI 2 Connections Group system eShop The address for connecting to the Group system eShop is configured in this area Offboard Diagnostic Infor mation System Service specifies an address General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand settings Details on Group system eShop Group system GFF Group system ElsaPro URL http 10 33 198 133 8000 VWiocalcpn certificateupdater Group system Carport Group system DISS Mirror server 2 Figure 11 27 Group system eShop view The URL for the eShop service for the automatic renewal of licences acquired via eShop is entered under Group system details eShop Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button 299 Administration mode Save To save your changes click on the Save button 2 Note Without the correct URL for the eShop licence update service automatic licence renew
252. o the hardware key of hardware ODS6007F Certificate expired on Please contact Support ODS6008F Certificate is not valid until Please contact Support ODS6009F _ No valid contractual status could be determined An error occurred while determining the dealer s Cancelling diagnostic session contract status Please contact Support ODS6010E You are not authorised for the selected brand An attempt is being made to load a diagnostic Loading the diagnostic session will be cancelled session with a non licensed brand Please contact Support ODS6011E The contractual status of the diagnostic session An attempt is being made to load a diagnostic does not correspond to your contractual status session of which the saved contract status does Loading the diagnostic session will be cancelled not correspond to the current contract status of the brand used Please contact Support ODS6012F No brand related information could be deter Please contact Support mined because no current brand is available ODS6013F There is no information in the licence for the Please contact Support brand ODS6101E Creation of or access to the certificate memory Please contact Support failed ODS6102E Importing the certificate file failed Please contact Support The file format is not supported ODS6103E Importing the certificate file failed Please contact Support The certificate file d
253. ocally that is transferred for further access caching Weighted sequence of test programs proposed to the service technician by the processing system for vehicle repairs A complete unit of a function test 8 digit binary code that indicates whether all diagnostic operations relevant for exhaust gas and safety were dealt with by the engine management system Version notes enclosed with a software version New or modified functions compared to previous versions are described in these version notes Copy of the current screen content into an image file Device that records measured values In computer technology server refers to a central network computer It pro vides the clients with the corresponding services or data A start module may consist of one or more function tests that are started au tomatically after the vehicle system test They are e g for checking whether new flash data is available for a vehicle system Electronic device for controlling and monitoring vehicle functions e g engine control unit See ECU vehicle system A screen that is also used as an input device The device e g a computer or mobile telephone can be controlled by touching screen contents This type of test is used to identify control units and derive information from them that enables automatic vehicle identification For this the structures of the equipment network are gone through automatically 359 UDS Update URL Variant
254. oes not only contain X 509 certificates ODS6104E Importing the certificate file failed Please contact Support The private key could not be determined Please check the password 342 Error messages ODS6105E Importing the certificate file failed Please contact Support The validity period of a certificate does not in clude the current date ODS6106E Importing the certificate file failed Please contact Support The certificate chain to be imported is not valid ODS6107E Importing the certificate file failed Please contact Support The certificate s hardware ID does not match the hardware ID of the current ODIS licence ODS6108E Importing the certificate file failed Please contact Support The certificate could not be inserted in the cer tificate memory ODS6109E _ Deleting the certificate failed Please contact Support The certificate could not be deleted from the cer tificate memory ODS6110E Access to the certificate memory for client cer Please contact Support tificates failed due to a changed hardware ID The certificate memory will now be re created ODS6501E The database required for the application was Please exit the application and check the instal not found lation Please contact Support ODS6502E Error while determining the metadata for the da Please contact Support ta adapter ODS6503E Database could not be opened Please close If that does not fi
255. of the target curve continue to run 2 Freeze frame To stop the cyclic repetition of the measurement and display the last diagram click on the Freeze frame button Unlike the Freeze frame function it is not possible to perform an evaluation without using the Target curve function 9 3 8 Freeze frame To stop the cyclic repetition of the measurement and display the last diagram click on the Freeze frame button Unlike the Freeze frame function it is not possible to perform an evaluation without using the Target curve function In addition the Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 buttons appear in the function area Use the mouse or the touchscreen to move the respective cursor Ed in the display area along the recorded signal curve The current position is displayed in the amplitude and time function area The orange arrow buttons in the operating area can be used to position the marking cursor more precisely in the grid 234 Test Instruments mode ae 9 a ei If both cursors are active the difference in amplitude and time between the cursor positions is shown in the function area instead of amplitude and time Onote The amplitude values and the difference in amplitude in the function area are shown in the colour of the respective channel If both channels are active the values are shown one below the other The time value is the same for both channels 9 4 Accepting measured values from diag nostic mode It is p
256. on System Service is continued Cancel The installation is terminated Use the Target platform pop up menu to select on which device Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is to be installed 19 Installation Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 el Target platform Selection of target platform rt y F Standard PC notebook Figure 3 6 Platform selection For diagnostic systems select the type of diagnostic system here for a PC or notebook always select the option Standard PC Notebook Back Go back in the installation process one step Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is continued Cancel The installation is terminated The Select application languages pop up menu is used to select the application languages supported 20 Installation Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 Joka Select the application languages Select the languages supported in Offboard Diagnostic Information System up to 5 languages can be selected English tB nok selected Figure 3 7 Selection of the application languages Up to 5 languages can be selected Back Go back in the installation process one step Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is continued Cancel The installation is terminated The Diagnostic interface pop up menu is used to select the desire
257. on of your software ODS8015E Communication with the vehicle could not be re Please contact Support set Possible cause there are still active diagnostic jobs 344 Error messages ODS8016E An error occurred during communication with Please contact Support the vehicle Check if the ignition is switched on ODS8017F An error occurred during hardware initialisa Please contact Support tion deinitialisation of with the following manufacturer error descrip tion ODS8018E An error occurred during communication with Please contact Support the vehicle The control unit s response contains implausible data ODS8S019E An error occurred during communication with Please contact Support the vehicle The code has not been applied by the control unit ODS8020E An error occurred during communication with Please contact Support the vehicle The operation on the control unit was faulty ODS8021E An error occurred during communication with Please contact Support the vehicle The operation was stopped by the control unit ODS8022E An error occurred during communication with Please contact Support the vehicle The entered value is outside the valid value range ODS8023E An error occurred during data input or interpre Please contact Support tation of data Possible causes One of the entered values ls outside the valid val ue range The control unit returns implausible data The MCD system repo
258. on view see fig UDS actuator selection A list of the available actuators of the control unit appears which that can be parametrised individually The actuator tests selected and configured this way can then be performed in succession or simul taneously The function can be exited in all states by closing the tab If the tab is exited e g by selecting a different tab or if the view is changed the status of the function is retained in terms of parametrisation However all currently active actuator tests are stopped That also applies if you switch from the conduction of actuator diagnosis back to the parametrisation It is therefore not possible to add or parametrise individual actuators during an active actuator diagnosis The four phases of actuator diagnosis for UDS control units are described in the following in detail 1 Actuator selection Control units Results Orders Process 17 Dash Board UDS ISOTP sCos2z0s 26 0208 8017 EV Kombi_UDS_VDD_RMOg A004040 Actuator diagnosis Select actuators Name Selection WO Premium Testbild 3 1 Segment test WO Premium Testbild 2 song WO Premium Testbild 1 Speedometer Acoustic turn signal acknowledgment N Engine Oil Level Indicator Light Clow Plug Indicator Lamp Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Indicator Lz ll Ig iil l 17 DTM ag Figure 6 135 UDS actuator selection The left hand list in this view contai
259. one number The Automat positive feedback field is used to set whether feedback on the statistical evaluation is to be sent after every diagnostic session even is there are no problems 288 Administration mode Off No automatic positive feedback is sent On Automatic positive feedback is sent reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button Note This information is required so that the support team can consult the correct contact in the event of enquiries Reference See also Support chapter 289 Administration mode 2 Support outgoing mail server The feedback mail connection for support is configured in this area Test instruments Test instruments Action Connections Support Storage locations General Contact data Details on Outgoing mail server raersnerseereeretnerer etret nt rt Connection parameters Connection Mail x Mail server vwagwox00055 vw vwd Mail server port 25 Mail server login Login name Password usage Secure connection a E mail delivery address Figure 11 19 Outgoing mail server view The following is set in Outgoing mail server details under Connection parameters e Connection An e mail is sent with every feedback Mail setting The feedbac
260. ons subfolder and resume it later on This button is enabled after performing a diagnosis Reference See next chapter Repair interruption a Next Click on this button to load a previously saved diagnostic session into Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service This button is only available directly after starting the application before perform ing a diagnosis Reference See next chapter Continuing a repair 12 1 3 1 Repair interruption Diagnostic sessions can be interrupted and restarted for a repair interruption The menu with the buttons is described in detail above gt Reference See also chapter Data 2 Note The vehicle state i e the state of the control units addressability identification data and event memory entries must not be changed between the saving and loading of the diagnostic session data I Stopp This button is used to interrupt the diagnostic session Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service then opens the Stop query Stop Do you want to save the current diagnostic session so that it can be subsequently resumed Figure 12 3 Query if a diagnostic session is cancelled Yes The storage location defined in the administration settings is proposed as the storage location 306 Additional program functions No Saving the diagnostic session is cancelled Save As Save in E sessions ly 4 i fie lei Wi fe SCRE OO008S_2010 12 14_14 17 15 se
261. ontrol unit Ignition reset e Please perform ignition reset Figure 6 117 Request to reset the ignition To do this switch the ignition key to the Off position and then back to its former position For UDS control units that support this option the user can click on the Plain text button to switch to the view for plain text coding Changes already made in the binary view are not applied In this case the user is informed about this by a message 132 Diagnostic mode Plain text code amp When you switch to plain text code data that has already been changed will be lost Continue Figure 6 118 Warning when switching to plain text code Yes Switches to the plain text code view Any changes in the binary view are lost No Does not switch to the plain text code view Changes in the binary view are retained If the code was saved without errors the Restore button is enabled Click on this button to restore the code last used To write the restored code into the control unit click on the Apply button again Plain text code When you switch to the plain text code the current code string is read out of the control unit and split up into its individual parameters They are displayed in the table along with their designation and read out value Results Orders Frocess 17 Dash Board UDSilsolPF sCog20e 2B Y0Z06 X01 EY Komb JUDES _YDD_RMUS 7504040 Control units
262. operating system s standard selection window opens for selecting the printer If a view ls empty e g atab without content this button is greyed out 12 1 2 Diagnostic protocol Diagnostic protocol Send Click on this button to send the current diagnostic protocol to Volkswagen For this an online connection and login to the Group systems are required If no such connection is currently available the data is stored temporarily and sent the next time the Group system is available after logging on to the Group systems In addition the diagnostic protocol is stored at the storage location for diagnostic protocols as file with the extension b64 for external transmission gt Reference See chapter Login to Group systems Daye Click on this button to save the current diagnostic protocol The Windows dialogue appears for saving files The DiagnosticProtocols subfolder in the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service directory is pro posed as the storage location The diagnostic protocol is saved in html format and can be viewed in the web browser This button is enabled after performing diagnosis Click on this button to print the current diagnostic protocol after selecting the scope of the protocol A print menu appears Select the printer This button is enabled after performing diagnosis Three different scopes are available to send save and print the saved protocol 1 The long protocol type includes the entire
263. operation is saved temporarily to the test device Itis also possible to send feedback Feedback messages are stored temporarily until test drive mode has been ended and a network connection re established They are sent by the system Test dri To cancel test drive mode click on this button Test drive mode can then either be cancelled or ended a Test drive mode Test drive mode is currently activated You can cancel or end test drive mode End test drive mode Figure 12 22 Ending test drive mode Cancel test drive mode If you click on this button no mobile data is synchronised with the workshop network The data created in test drive mode will be deleted End test drive mode If you click on this button the mobile data from Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is synchronised with the workshop network and test drive mode is ended Cancel Ending or cancelling test drive mode is cancelled and the diagnostic session remains in test drive mode hi Test drive mode Test drive mode has been successfuly cancelled Figure 12 23 Confirmation that test drive mode has been cancelled Ok Cancellation of test drive mode is confirmed Test drive mode Figure 12 24 Confirmation that test drive mode has been ended 319 Additional program functions Ok Ending test drive mode is confirmed The symbols in the information area of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service are displayed here
264. option of diagnosis and flashing for the licensed brands Which vehicle models of this brand are available depends on the type of dealer of a brand in the licence All vehicle models are available to a licensed authorised dealer dealer type H Only EU vehicles are available to a licensed unaffiliated market participant dealer type U of a brand It s possible to check the contents of the licence in the administration area Cy See also Administration General Licence info An unaffiliated market participant must log on to the Group systems online at the start of a diagnostic or flash session to enable diagnostic or flash start up If login is cancelled Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service returns to the start screen After login Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service displays the remaining duration of validity of the diagnostic flat rate in days and hours in the Information area of the user interface under Time remaining In addition the Actions tab and History tab are not available to the unaffiliated market participant During diagnostic start up Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service checks the vehicle status accord ing to the battery and ignition status e Is the battery connected terminal 30 battery voltage e Isa vehicle connected terminal 30 battery voltage e Is this vehicle s ignition switched on terminal 15 ignition If the battery is not connected the Battery not connected
265. or occurred during automatic vehicle identification Please identify the vehicle manually Figure 6 16 Error during automatic identification OK Identification mode is switched to manual Basically there are two possible reasons why automatic identification failed e An error occurred while reading the VIN e g due to a faulty control unit e An error occurred while determining the diagnostic data corresponding to the VIN The data pool is outdated or incorrect If an error occurs during automatic identification you have the option of switching between automatic mode and manual mode When switching from automatic mode to manual mode all previously determined basic characteristics are retained but can be changed However if basic characteristics are changed all previously selected characteristics will expire When switching from manual mode to automatic mode all basic characteristics entered manually as valid are retained That means the validity of manually entered characteristics is automatically checked and adjusted if necessary For example an invalid VIN is replaced by the VIN automatically read Fahrzeugidentifikation automatisch manuell WIN WWWDUT7SCA4TPO148 Eine VIN muss aus 17 Zeichen bestehen Figure 6 17 Entering the VIN manually In manual mode the plausibility of the entered VIN is checked e g for its correct length 17 characters There is no other technical check of the VIN The manually entered VIN must
266. or the configuration of the network drives The structure of the folders can be organised as one sees fit The local path structure of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service after automatic installation and the default folder names in the administration of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service are a useful starting point gt Reference See also Administration mode chapter 30 Installation 2 Note If Internet Explorer Version 6 is configured as the default browser the following setting 1s required for com munication with the Group systems to work correctly Internet Properties 2 leg General Security Privacy Content Connechons Programs Advanced Settings Enable Personalized Favorites Menu ra Enable third party browser extensions requires restart F l Enable visual styles on buttons and controls in web pages Force offscreen compositing even under Terminal Server regu Notify when downloads complete ill Heuss bela for Ren HEIRENES eer ere ett eter ter te re ttre tte ete ete ert te rer ret ferret vil Show hiencll URLs Show Go button n Address bar Underline links Always Hover Never Use inline AutoComplete Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling bal ame i ER Restore Defaults Figure 3 19 Internet options for Internet Explorer 6 On the Advanced tab of the browser s intern
267. orrectly installed control units were not identified during diagnostic start up Not identified Identify again Engine Control Module 2 Immobilizer Figure 6 31 Control units not identified dialogue All control units that have not been identified are displayed in the left hand field of the dialogue By marking one or more control units and clicking on the direction arrow gt control units can be moved into the right hand window to be identified again Control units can also be moved into the left hand window using lt if repeated identification is not desired Repeat reading To start another attempt to read these control units click on this button If the control units are still not identified the dialogue appears again The list of control units then only includes those previously selected Close To close the dialogue and end repeated identification click on this button 70 Diagnostic mode 6 2 5 1 Control unit list The control units can be viewed in the control unit list or in the block diagram The desired view is selected using the corresponding button Steuerger te Auftr ge viss frei Pr fplan Ablauf Sandemunktonen Steuergerateliste 50 Eintr ge Adre sse Ereig nis Nam e el 42 1 Tuerelektronik Fahrer 42 T relektronik Fahrerseite 1K0959701M D9XX Tuer SG 004 BER 52 2 Tuerelektronik Beifahrer 52 T relektronik Beifahrerseite 1KO
268. ory entries Should a new test plan be created Figure 6 85 Erasing the event memory Yes Click on this button to re create the test plan thus continuing guided fault finding No No new test plan is created and exiting guided fault finding is continued In the next step for ending the diagnostic session what are referred to as end modules are executed These pro grams are based on the diagnosed vehicle model and its equipment variants There is no group of defined end module programs They are compiled individually by diagnostic editors for the existing vehicle models Their se quence cannot be described for all vehicles in the same way The program sequence may also deviate significantly The end module programs are executed like GFF test programs on the Process tab Depending on the program decisions might be required or questions might need to be answered 111 Diagnostic mode 2 Note The readiness code program is an exception to this rule This program is an integral component of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service which is always executed when guided fault finding is ended The readiness code program is an end module created by diagnostic editors for diesel vehicles with diesel par ticulate filter That is why the program sequences of these diesel vehicles may deviate Create readiness code 2 The readiness code must be re created Do you want to do this now Figure 6 86 Executing the program for
269. ossible to transfer measured values from Diagnostic mode to Test instruments mode 2 Note The Measured value diagnosis function is only available if measured values have been selected in Diagnostic mode gt Reference see also Diagnostic start up chapter 2 Default settings in diagnostic mode Click on the Diagnosis button to activate the corresponding mode The desired control unit must then be selected gt Reference See also chapter Diagnostic start up Select the control unit for which measured values are to be accepted Then right click on the current selection The following group of buttons is displayed from which the Test instruments button needs to be selected 235 Test Instruments mode Read event memory Read all event memories suided Tunetions Control unit self diagnosis vehicle self diagnosis A w ndow is opened for selecting a measured value block KWP control units or individual measured values UDS control units After selecting the measured value block or individual measured values a max mum of four measured values can be displayed confirm the selection by clicking on the OK button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 After confirmation Test instruments mode is automatically set The Measured value diagnosis function is available for both the Multimeter function and the Oscilloscope function Measured values diagnosis After clicking on the Measured value diagnosis bu
270. ostic database can be set n this area p Ser General Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Storage locations Support Database Details on Database Database Diagnostic session Flash paths Directory C Program Files Offboard_Diagnostic_Information_System_Service DI DBidata Diagnostic log Figure 11 14 Database directory Select This button can be used to set the storage location of the database directory in Database details in the Windows file system Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 282 Administration mode 2 Note You must consult support before changing this path Otherwise the vehicle s diagnostic data is no longer available If the database is copied to a different location the new path needs to be entered here 2 Storage locations diagnostic session The storage location and the file name setting of the diagnostic session data can be preconfigured in this area Storage locations Support Connections General Test instruments Test instruments Action Database Details on Diagnostic session nn piagnosiie an Flash paths Target directory C Program Files Offboard_Diagnostic_Information_System_Serviceisessions Diagnostic log File
271. ou would like Setup to create the program s shortcuts then click Next Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 7 Zip Accessories Administrative Tools Altova Missionkit 2010 Bluetooth CamStudio COBurnersP Create shortcuts for all users Don t create a Start Menu Folder Figure 3 11 Selecting the start menu folder To create a shortcut to Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service on the desktop for each user tick the checkbox Create shortcuts for all users To make the shortcut on the desktop visible only to the user installing Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service deselect the checkbox Back Go back in the installation process one step Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is continued The copying and installation process starts Cancel The installation is terminated The progress of the copying and installation process is displayed via a progress bar 24 Installation x Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 Jog installing Please wait while Setup installs Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service on your computer r Extracting files tk jar Cancel Figure 3 12 Displaying the copying process Cancel The installation is terminated 2 Note Depending on the capacity of the processor the installation process may take several minutes The progress of the installation of the diagnost
272. our finger if you are using the touchscreen If you are using a mouse hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse to access the desired point in the block diagram This button is not enabled in the overall view of the block diagram Note If the u symbol is activated it is not possible to double click using the touchscreen or left mouse button Individual control units are displayed differently depending on their state 74 Diagnostic mode The control unit was not identified and is only installed in vehicles with a full options package The control unit was not identified but it exists in the gateway installation list The control unit has been found and identified and does not have any event memory entries MOTO No event memory entries were found for this control unit Figure 6 36 Examples of the graphical display of the control units In the event of a longer click approx one second or right click on a control unit in the block diagram or the control unit list another button bar opens The buttons on this bar apply to the control unit selected Test instruments E Identify control unit i t Select variant Read all event memories fw Control unit self diagnosis __ enicle sel diagnosis Figure 6 37 Buttons for the individual control units The following buttons are available via the context menu 75 Diagnostic mode Test instruments Identify control unit Sel
273. pdate reading is started again immediately after finishing a reading cycle The interval may be changed during the update in cycles The new value needs to be confirmed using the Return key To stop updates in cycles remove the tick from the in cycles option It is also possible to update the table immediately between two cycles by clicking on the now button After reading all event memories double click on a table row to select the Read event memory function for the corresponding control unit the prerequisite for this is that it was possible to read the control unit s event memory As a result the content of the event memory of the selected control unit is displayed on a new tab Cy Reference See Event memory chapter Once the event memory has been read completely at least once the user may erase the event memory of the overall system For this there are several methods that depend on the control unit or vehicle For example the error memories can be erased together in one go or in succession Delete Overall system Y Figure 6 147 Selecting the method for erasing the event memory To erase the event memory in one go select Overall system from the list in this example it is already selected by default and confirm this by clicking on the Execute button A confirmation prompt appears Do you really want to erase all event memories Do you really want to delete ALL event memory entries Figure
274. plications behind the keyboard to be read The virtual keyboard has no title bar no system menu and no Minimise and Maximise buttons Instead it has I ME keys that can be used to set the size type numeric or normal keyboard and trans parency of the keyboard 240 Virtual keyboard manual ee oprachspezifisches Tastaturlayouf III 4 SWC Figure 10 2 Keyboard layout IWIOW Figure 10 3 Numeric keyboard The I ME keys have the following meaning Shows the settings dialogue Reduces the size of the keyboard Increases the size of the keyboard Displayed components on the numeric keyboard Hiding the numeric keyboard Table 10 3 I ME keys 10 2 1 1 Size of keyboard Two keys can be used to scale the keyboard The size of the keys and characters is adapted automatically when the size of the keyboard is changed It is not possible to increase the size of the keyboard beyond the size of the screen If you try to move the keyboard out of the screen area it is pushed back After hiding and re displaying the keyboard it assumes its last size and position 241 Virtual keyboard manual The set size of the virtual keyboard is saved not its current position however That means the virtual keyboard is displayed at the bottom in the centre in the size last used when the user displays the keyboard for the first time after a restart 10 2 1 2 Special keys On pressing a special key SHIFT STRG
275. process via flash CD 357 Gateway installation list Guided fault finding Guided functions Default setting Basic characteristics Hardware key hardwareID Hotfix IP address Actual no Calibration Maximum no Test instruments Measured value block Mirror server Offline Online Online protocol Online connection Glossary A gateway control unit has information on the vehicle systems installed in the vehicle It monitors the vehicle systems and keeps a status list By querying the gateway installation list e g whether the event memory of a vehicle system is set it is possible to query whether it is registered coded or whether commu nication is possible The installation list is evaluated in the context of vehicle identification and improves the performance of the identification process With guided fault finding the diagnostic procedure is integrated in an opti mised process consisting of vehicle identification vehicle system test test plan and function tests Execution of a vehicle specific function outside GFF e g determining a mea sured value The default setting 1s used to adapt control units to the peripheral devices A vehicle is identified via the basic characteristics type model year variant and engine code Its equipment however is determined during the vehicle system test Hardware features coded as strings The hardwarelD is part of the device spe cific licence
276. processing only possible to a limited extent if discrepancies or error messages occur that impede the workflow Activate Order processing not possible if this error prevents you from working with Offboard Diagnostic In formation System Service To add the current diagnostic session select the Add current diagnostic session checkbox Diagnostic session Attach current diagnostic session Figure 12 34 Attaching a diagnostic session The current diagnostic session includes information that makes it easier for the Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service development team to understand the user s feedback The current diagnostic protocol is attached automatically with every feedback 2 Note The Attach current diagnostic session checkbox should always be selected if support is requested due to prob lems executing GFF In the event of errors please do not fail to include a screenshot to accelerate identification and rectification of the error 327 Additional program functions If Mail server login is activated in the support outgoing mail server administration the dialogue for logging on to the server appears when you click on the Send button E Feedback mail server login Global user IO Fassword Information 2 feedback message s are available tor transmission Which you can Send nom Cancel Apply The user and password data entered is used to log on to the mail server and send the feedback Figur
277. r a long term measurement is limited by the timebase sampling rate The data quantity increases proportionately with the sampling rate The maximum recording time 1s 55 hours and 33 minutes for a time base of 10s div The measuring duration is adjusted automatically by the device if the timebase is changed The following table lists the maximum measuring times In relation to the set timebase Set timebase time div Maximum measuring time h min Table 9 2 Maximum measuring time during long term measurement 2 Starting the long term measurement To start the long term measurement click on the locked Freeze frame button If the set measuring time has elapsed the Freeze frame function is automatically activated and the measurement ends The text Long term measurement ended also appears in the display area All recorded data is shown across the width of the display area in compressed form After the measurement has ended the signal curves can be evaluated using the cursor function It is also possible to zoom in on a Selected area as required The corresponding buttons are shown in the function area see Evaluating long term measurements sub item 224 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Osciloscope Long term measurement ended Figure 9 19 Evaluating long term measurements Onote The values set for a measurement cannot be changed during the long term measurement It is advisable not to connect or disconnect US
278. r or contact Support available The data will be stored temporarily and sent au tomatically when the Group system is available again and Offboard Diagnostic Information Sys tem Service has been started on this computer 347 Error messages ODS9216E The diagnostic protocol cannot be saved The Please try again later or contact Support storage location is not available The protocol will be stored temporarily in en crypted form and saved automatically when the storage location is available again and Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service has been started on this computer ODS9217E Receiving system for the current build status not Please try again later or contact Support available The data will be stored temporarily and sent au tomatically when the Group system is available again and Offboard Diagnostic Information Sys tem Service has been started on this computer ODS9218E Template is missing in the GFF data The test Please contact Support will be cancelled ODS9219E No URL found in the configuration data for the Please contact Support alias The test will be cancelled Table 14 1 Table of error IDs 14 2 Other error messages 14 2 1 Firewall messages When carrying out updates for Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service a firewall message may be displayed Windows Security Alert 3 To help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features
279. r parametrisation of the respective channel click on the Channel A or Channel B button To exit channel parametrisation click on the selected button again After activating the Channel A or Channel B button a parametrisation dialogue in the colour of the activated channel appears in the operating area Channel parametrisation is explained below using channel A as an example The same procedure applies to channel B 216 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Oscilloscope Figure 9 16 Parametrisation of channel A 2 Assigning the measurement option Click on the arrow of the Channel pop up menu in the operating area to assign the desired measuring functions to the active channel The following measuring functions are available e OFF No measurement connection selected e DSO1 DSO channel A e DSO2 DSO channel B e KY KV clamp e Temp T P Temperature corresponding to connected sensor or also depending on the device Temp T P 1 and Temp T P 2 e Pressure T P Pressure corresponding to connected sensor or also depending on the device Pressure T P 1 and Pressure T P 2 e SZ Clamp on ammeter 217 Test Instruments mode Onote In case of a parallel measurement channel A and channel B are assigned a measurement option and both are active In case of a single measurement either channel A or channel B is active 2 Setting the measuring range Use the arrow buttons in the operating area to set the meas
280. roduction Prev Chapter 6 Diagnostic mode B System requirements B Installation S Update Using GFF aA Application start usel 50 Diagnostic mode The focus of the Using GFF section is on the execution of tests of Guided Fault Finding GFF B Diagnostic workflt aA Diagnostic start u Testplan and 0 Test plan and spe gerne special Ending See CEE start u rey TTT i 9 HD Self diagnosis Flash mode Executing CO Info mode start modules aA Administration mode mA Additional program fi B External verification WO Error messages A Index B Glossary sori Calculating the Grou sp test plan Adjusting the iest plan DISS TPI Selecting an order identificating control units Figure 12 27 The online help window In the left hand area of the online help you can use the table of contents to find the desired chapters For navigation in the table of contents and the search results there are navigation symbols below the window The navigation symbols can be used from the left to the right to open the complete table of contents to list all search results of a search to display the current link and to set a bookmark In the right hand area of the online help the desired information is displayed after selecting a chapter Use the navigation bar to navigate in this area The search function can also be used to search for specific ter
281. rol units and of the long code for KWP control units is identical The following description applies to the binary code but also applies to the long code in the same way The code string is displayed in a table view Every row of the table corresponds to a byte of the code string ia units Process I Dash Board UDS ISOTP 309208 7ZB F 02067 S014 EW kombi UDS MDD RMOS A040400 Results Orders Subsystem ID KOMBI Byte no Current hex value Current binary value Hex input Binary input 0 26 00100110 1 OB 00001011 00 OOO00000 oe digit 17 COD 8 Figure 6 111 Binary code The table has five columns Byte no The byte number in the code string 129 Diagnostic mode Current value hex The value in hexadecimal representation Current value binary The value in binary representation Input hex The user s entry in hexadecimal representation Input binary The user s entry in binary representation There are three buttons below the table Apply Writes the modified code string into the control unit Restore Restores the code last used Plain text code Switches to plaint text code representation if supported by the control unit Otherwise the button is disabled The value may be changed in binary form as well as in hexadecimal form If you click in one of the two cells anew input screen will appear fo Enter binary code Current value Input Hex 26 26 Binary 100100110 001001
282. roup of individual pieces of information that can be opened by clicking on If the group is open is displayed in front of its main entry Click on this symbol to close the group again There are three areas for additional functions to the right of the tables Refresh Clicking on the now button triggers re reading of the event memory Selecting the in cycles checkbox initiates the reading of the event memory in cycles at the cycle time entered in the text field below If the cycle time is changed click on the now button again to accept the new cycle time 135 Diagnostic mode Sort You can enter a criterion here by which the event memory entries are sorted in the table at the top Clicking on the column headings of the table at the top reverses the sort order ascending descending The default sort order is descending by priority and the time of the occurrence of the events displayed Refresh Pi lin cycles Z Sec Priority Kilometres Event code Frequency Figure 6 121 Sorting the event memory entries Delete To delete the contents of the event memory in the selected control unit click on the Event memory button A confirmation dialogue appears The event memory is only erased after confirmation using the yes button Click on no to cancel the process 2 Note After erasing an event memory it is re read immediately and its content is displayed If the event memory is not empty and still inclu
283. rs again 27 Installation Offboard Diagnostic Information System PostSetup PostSetup Eingabe der Konfigurationsdaten Mutzername Kennwort Zur Vervoallstandiqung Ihrer Installation mussen die marken und sprachabh ngigen Bestandteile erg nzt werden Abbrechen Figure 3 16 Starting the PostSetup The completion of the installation by the PostSetup works like a software update It can be executed via the mternet using the preset URL of the importer s mirror server The correct URL the user name and password are required for this If the installation data for the PostSetup is available locally e g on DVD the installation can also be completed without internet access URL Mirror server address depends on the importer This field is always on a red background This colour indicates that the specified URL is correct Select local directory Opens Windows Explorer via which the directory with the PostSetup files is selected User name User ID for access to the mirror server Password Password for access to the mirror server Cancel PostSetup is cancelled gt PostSetup is continued 28 Installation Offboard Diagnostic Information System PostSetup Post5etup Software Update Es steht ein Update zur Verf gung Maximale Download Gr e 37642KByte Download zZeiten DSL 1024k t2 Minuten 10 Sekunden DSL STK 24 Minuten 20 Sekunden ISDN 64k 182 Minuten 35 Sekunden Modem 56k 208 M
284. rst view as shown in the figure above use the Display measured values button to open the measured value display The configuration of the measured values to be displayed deviates depending on whether the measured values were read by control units with KWP protocol or by control units with UDS protocol 6 6 2 6 1 Measured values with KWP control units The measured values to be read out must be selected first Process O39 Central Electrics KVVP2000 TP20 3C0gs 049AE 2000 HS1 Results Orders Control units Name Selection 1 1 152 1 3 1 4 Block Position Measured value designator 1 Apply Display measured values a Figure 6 130 Measured value selection KWP For control units with KWP protocol measured value blocks are read out with up to four measured values The measured value block numbers 1 to 254 and if necessary the measured value position within the corresponding measured value block are entered in the Block Position text field separated by a dot After the entry has been made the Apply button is enabled If a block number outside the valid value range is entered Apply remains disabled Click on Apply to transfer the entry to the right hand list containing the selected measured values If only the block number is entered when you click on Apply all four measured values of this block are displayed By 147 Diagnostic mode entering further measured values any number of
285. rts the following error Error code Error code description ODS8024E An error occurred during communication with Please contact Support the MCD system The MCD job did not return any results after its execution ODS8025E It is not possible to access communication pa Please contact Support rameters of the control unit before connecting 345 Error messages ODS8026E Communication with the vehicle has been inter Please contact Support rupted Possible causes Vehicle or battery not connect ed Error code Error code description Note ODS8027E For control unit the connection cannot be Please contact Support terminated due to existing communication jobs When communication with this control unit is finished you can try again to disconnect ODS8028E Communication protocol is not supported Please contact Support ODS8029E No gateway available Please contact Support ODS8030E No bus master available Please contact Support O DS8031E There is an error in the existing diagnostic data Please contact Support Diagnostic start up cannot be performed ODS8032E Work is not possible with the selected method Please contact Support No other methods are available to continue di agnostic start up ODS8033E Work is not possible with the selected method Please contact Support Diagnostic start up must be continued with a dif ferent method
286. rves can be distinguished according to their colour Channel Colour of the measuring signal and the correspond Colour of the target curve and the corresponding ing measuring range measuring range A Yellow measuring range at the top left of the dis Blue measuring range at the top right of the display play area area Green measuring range at the bottom left of the dis Red measuring range at the bottom right of the dis play area play area Table 9 3 Colour of the signal curves Oscilloscope Multimeter BREI Delete Figure 9 24 Showing target curves 233 Test Instruments mode When displaying target curves the measuring signal may be exactly on top of the recorded signal for the target curve To be able to better distinguish the two curves use the scroll bar on the right side of the display area to vertically shift the measuring curve with regard to the target curve Select the respective channel beforehand using the Channel A and Channel B buttons in the operating area 2 Saving target curves To save the displayed target curve with all its channel settings to another directory click on the Save button The file name is retained 2 Deleting target curves To delete the displayed target curve click on the Delete button A dialogue appears asking you to confirm this deletion To delete the target curve permanently click on the Yes button The measurements parametrised with the parameters
287. s My Recent Documents Desktop us hy Documents 3 hy Computer File name Z223CZ8E 0000852101214 14 48 05 ses V Save l My Network Save as type hee Figure 12 4 Saving a diagnostic session Diagnostic session files have the file extension ses Save The diagnostic session is saved Cancel Saving the diagnostic session is cancelled After saving the session Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service asks whether feedback is to be sent amp Send support request Flease select an option i Nowarnings or errors detected during the diagnostic session Figure 12 5 Feedback after saving a diagnostic session Cancel The support request is cancelled Send support request The support request is sent Then the system is back at the start position again gt Reference 307 Additional program functions See Administration chapter Storage locations area i Note The diagnostic sessions are saved in the default settings to the test device thus enabling a diagnostic session to also be resumed or interrupted in test drive mode If a network path has been entered in the settings the data will be saved locally during mobile operation and compared when a network connection is available Changes to the settings for saving data can be made in Admin mode gt Reference See also Administration chapter Storage locations area 1
288. s Supplemental language support Most languages are installed by default To install additional languages select the appropriate check bos below Install files for comples script and right to left languages Including T hail Language used in menus and dialogs colle rl English Figure 11 4 Additional Windows language support On the Languages tab activate the options in the Supplemental language support area OK The changes are applied and the window is closed Cancel The changes are not applied and the window is closed Apply The changes are applied and the window is not closed 271 Administration mode Regional and Language Options Ax Regional Options Languages Advanced Language for non Unicode programs This system setting enables non Unicode programs to display menus and dialogs in their native language It does not affect Unicode programs Gut it does apply to all users of this computer Select a language to match the language version of the non Unicode programs pou want to use Engish United Kingdom Code page conversion tables 10001 MAC Japanese 10002 MAC Traditional Chinese Big 10003 MAC Korean 10004 MAC Arabic 10005 MAC Hebrew w Default user account settings Figure 11 5 Windows language display codes On the Advanced tab activate all Code page conversion tables On the
289. s access authorisation For control units with KWP 2000 or UDS protocol there are several ways to perform access authorisation For KWP 2000 there are the following options e Code 2 e Security access automatic e Security access level 3 4 e Security access level 5 6 The UDS protocol supports these options Login e System specific access authorisation Which of these options is displayed in the list for selection depends on the corresponding control unit 159 Diagnostic mode To perform access authorisation select the desired option and confirm it by clicking on Continue A new dialogue appears in which a numeric code needs to be entered in the Login code field for authentication bP Access authorisation Access authorisation Enter login code Please click on Continue Login code 123 Figure 6 143 Access authorisation Authentication After clicking on the Continue button authentication is performed and the result of the function is displayed If authentication was successful Successful is displayed there If it failed a message is displayed accordingly If available more information on the cause of the error 1s displayed Click on Details to have any additional information displayed if required eo Access authorisation Access authorisation Ended Successfull Details OKAY 1 Access authorisation Access authorisation Ended A Not succe
290. s connected and diagnosis has started vehicle identification and evaluation of the DTC memory will take place Then the Guided Fault Finding and Guided Functions will be available for vehicle diagnosis If you would like to work without a warranty order you also have the option to use OBD er Connection to the vehicle established X Switch the ignition on P Start diagnosis Figure 5 4 The Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service user interface The user interface is divided into several areas Information area Client area Modes and standard functions Status area The individual areas have the following functions Information area The information area contains general information on the licence the order and the vehicle currently connected Importer 123 Vehicle identification na VAIS 4 SCS EODO08S Dealer 6 890 Engine AK Order a Remaining runtime gt 64 Tage 23h Figure 5 5 The information area The area on the left shows the importer number dealership number and order number 40 Application start user interface The vehicle ID and the engine code are available in the centre For unaffiliated market participants the remaining time of the diagnostic flat rate is displayed in the area in the centre after logging on to the Group systems The area on the rights uses symbols to indicate whether There is a diagnostic connection to the vehicle There is a diagnostic connection
291. s used in GFF test programs the URLs of which can be entered e Pin Service e SVMService e RepairHints e ProtoService 294 Reset Administration mode To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service specifies addresses for these services 2 Note If incorrect addresses are entered here GFF test programs will not be able to access the necessary Group systems and can therefore not be executed successfully 2 Connections Group system ElsaPro The access data for services of the ElsaPro Group system is configured here General Brand settings Group system GFF Group system eShop Group system Carport Group system DISS Mirror server 2 Storage locations Support Connections Details on Group system ElsaPro URL for vehicle history URL for Workshop Manuals URL for Technical Product Information URL for job data URL for circuit diagrams URL for field actions Brand 1 character Country 3 characters Dealer D 5 characters Figure 11 24 ElsaPro Group system view Test instruments Test instruments Action http Wlocalcpn cpn vwg SPKRESERYVE httpviVVvlocalcpn cpon vwg SPK RL httpivVvlocalcpn cpn vwg SPK T PL https
292. sal Diagnostic strategy with which the user selects possibly faulty functions or components himself If errors in vehicle systems are also detected during the diagnostic session or if a complaint message was entered a distinction is al ways made in the test plan between system test plan and own test plan An end module may consist of one or more function tests that are started au tomatically after exiting guided fault finding End modules are e g for feed back to the vehicle manufacturer Logical link between perceived symptoms and or symptoms from the event memory model A rule based on experience may be weighted according to its reliability and assigned to one or more diagnostic objects eShop is the system for ordering and licensing software and diagnostic data within Volkswagen s Offboard Diagnostic Information System Vehicle identification is performed by determining the basic vehicle charac teristics type model year variant engine code that can also be identified automatically or semi automatically at an existing gateway This data is used to create a list of control units and equipment possibly installed and check their installation during the vehicle system test Flash data refers to program components that can be loaded for a vehicle sys tem Read only memory the data of which is retained even without power supply Unlike permanently programmed memory modules a flash memory can be updated by a corresponding update
293. se Mechanik Hinweis E raat cancel setzen Nach jedem Bremsbelagwechsel 53 Vorderradbremse instand setzen Bremssa das Bremspedal im Stand 0 Bremsbel ge aus und einbauen mehrmals kr ftig durchtreten Vorderradbremse instand setzen Bremssattel FN _ damit die Bremsbel ge ihren dem 6 Bremsbel ge aus und einbauen Betriebszustand entsprechenden Vorderradbremse instand setzen Bremssattel 2FI Sitz einnehmen 0 Bremsbel ge aus und einbauen 4 Hinterradbremse instand setzen Scheibenbremse F Drehmomentschl ssel V A G 1331 3 Drehmomentschl ssel V A G 1410 Bremspedalbelaster V A G 1869 2 Zum Absaugen von Bremsfl ssigkeit aus dem Bremsfl ssigkeitsbeh lter das 4 Hinterradbremse instand setzen Scheibenbremse Bremsen F ll und 9 Hinterradbremse instand setzen Trommelbremse Entl ftungsger t VAS 5234 oder a Handbremshebel Montage bersicht die Absaugeinrichtung v P 5 V A G 1869 4 verwenden KI Figure 8 14 Manuals tab view The documents are listed by their VIN in a tree structure on the left side of the window Click on the required manual to display it in the window on the right Scroll forward a page Scroll back a page You can use this button to reload content Authorised dealers can log on to the Group systems here again 192 Info mode 8 5 Circuit diagrams tab You can use the Circuit diagrams tab to access the circuit diagrams required for the vehic
294. setting option is only available if Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service was purchased with this feature Save locations Support Verification General Connections Configuration Details about Configuration in Sie aes ar Verification target directory C Verifier code Verifier first name Verifier last name Verifier e mail address Figure 11 29 External verification view Select In Configuration details under Configuration this button is used to specify the verification target directory in the Windows file system That is the default directory for saving verification data provided from GFF editors via mirror server 2 Data on the tester editing the verification data is entered in the other fields e Initials of tester e First name of tester e Surname of tester e E mail address of tester 301 Administration mode reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button If the Verification tab is activated for the first time during a diagnostic session after starting Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service a login dialogue is displayed in which the tester s data needs to be entered This login dialogue contains the data entered and saved here as the default values 2 Note The external
295. sh session in Flash mode 61 Diagnostic mode Flashing start up identificating control units Figure 6 21 Select order section Flash start up During flash start up after login to the Group systems the order selection is opened on the Orders tab The order selection process is identical in both modes Reference Selecting orders during flash start up is also described in the chapter Flash Order selection mode The view switches to the Orders tab after Group system login Control units Orders No orders Found Order Begetrzion mat Figure 0 22 Order view during diagnostic start up 62 Diagnostic mode Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service lists all orders available for the identified vehicle on the Orders tab The order number is displayed under Order the current status in the SCP process under SCP status and the vehicle s licence plate number the date of the order and a descriptive text on the order are displayed in the order list The meaning of the SCP status numbers is listed in the following table Table 6 1 Meaning of the SCP status numbers Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service checks whether there is an online connection to the Group systems to be able to load order and vehicle data from ElsaPro The configuration of the web service for access to ElsaPro is described here gt Reference See also ElsaPro connections Norm
296. signal curves can be moved horizontally in the grid The trigger point coloured arrow according to the channel colour can be moved along with the curve Once the maximum left or right image position has been reached the respective arrow button becomes inactive e Timebase Scanning the signal curves in x direction can be increased and reduced The current timebase is shown centred in the top edge of the display area Once the maximum or minimum timebase has been reached the corresponding arrow button becomes inactive 2 Note To set the image position and timebase the buttons Channel A Channel B Measuring mode Trigger mode and Target curves should not be enabled Onote Timebase in Draw mode Timebase in other modes I channel active 0 2 100 s div 1 25 us div to 0 1 s div with active long term measurement 5ms div to with active Min Max function 5 us div to 0 1 s 100 s div div 2 channels active 0 2 100 s div 2 5 us div to 0 1 s div with active long term measurement 5ms div to with active Min Max function 5 us div to 0 1 s 100 s div div Table 9 1 Setting the timebase The minimum timebase 1 25 us div can only be set for single channel operation channel A or channel B active In dual channel operation the minimum timebase is 2 5 us div The timebases 20 50 and 100 s div can only be set in Draw measuring mode 9 3 2 Channel parametrisation To activate the operating area fo
297. sis section To end diagnosis click on the End diagnosis button on the Control units tab 109 Diagnostic mode piss Tr Test plan Process Special functions Control units Orders Block diagram AIR_15 ALR 22 BRE_03 MOT 01 connector Antrieb Diagnose MOV_31 LKH_44 GET_02 End diagnosis KLH_08 EZE 09 7 Do you want to end the current diagnostic session THL 62 Komfort Infotainment k A EA Graphic presentation finished Block diagram Control unit list Event memory list Figure 6 82 Ending diagnosis Then Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens the End diagnosis confirmation window asking Do you want to end the current diagnostic session Yes The diagnostic session is ended No The diagnostic session is not ended It is continued in unchanged form On selecting Yes Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service will ask you whether guided fault finding is to be continued in the Exit GFF Decision exit GFF window If not all tests of the test plan have been executed yet the window contains a note informing you that the test plan has not been executed completely yet Exit GFF Decision exit GFF amp The test plan has not been completely finished yet Would you like to continue guided fault finding Note if no all error memories willbe erased and queried once again and the entir
298. splayed Individual branches can be opened in the tree structure by clicking on the plus sign or closed by clicking on the minus sign After marking one of the documents listed in the tree structure using the mouse the button for displaying the document is enabled Display document The marked document is opened The document can also be opened directly in the document tree by double clicking on it 182 Info mode Documents Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Vehicle PR no 426 0020 lt Figure 8 4 View of a document To return to the document structure click on this button There are documents with text only or images only or combined text image documents The combined text image documents are displayed next to each other Below are two examples of typical documents for a vehicle Example 1 of a pure text document 183 Info mode Documents factions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Venice PR no f E Documents for vehicle Powertrain Repair Group 01 10 to 26 28 to 39 Suspension Repair Group 01 40 to 49 Stromlaufplan Einbauort Werkzeuge Reparaturanleitung Sicherungsbelegung Body Repair Group 01 27 50 to 97 Software version management Documents special tools test equipment and gauges tools Vehicle information documents Documents location Documents Function
299. ssful Details Job completed with errors Done Cancel Figure 6 145 Access authorisation Unsuccessful 160 Diagnostic mode You can use the Done button to end the method In addition the user can use the Back button in every dialogue to switch to the previous step to re enter the authentication code or select another authentication method To cancel the process in any dialogue click on the Cancel button 6 6 3 Vehicle specific functions 6 6 3 1 Event memories for overall system The Event memories for overall system function reads the event memories of all control units installed in the vehicle Control units oe Orders Results racess Control units with event entries Refresh Address System Event Ed now 17 Dash Board KWP2000 TP20 f 300920871 X 7161 4 E Results Clin cycles E 00331 004 Instrument cluster data bus No signalfcommunic 30 Sec 005652 010 Gil level thermal sensor 5266 Open circuit short 00773010 Outside air temperature sensor 51 7 Open circul Delete Overall system I 00771 O10 Fuellevel sensor G Open circuit short circuit to Execute Date 21 62 63 31 15 0127 Mileage 1 km Priority 2 Fre 18 Auxiliary Parking Heater 19 Gateway 1C Yehicle Position Detection 20 High Beam Assistance 39 All Wheel antral Bd Sum of event entries 4 VEH ESP x Figure 6 146 Event memories for overall system
300. ssion Figure 6 88 Print diagnostic protocol Print Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service transfers a formatted diagnostic protocol to the default Windows printer driver It is opened and can be printed with all familiar Windows settings The completion of the printout needs to be confirmed with OK Then the Exit GFF print save diagnostic protocol dialogue is opened again 113 Diagnostic mode Save Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens the Select diagnostic protocol dialogue After selecting the type of protocol which can be cancelled the Windows Save dialogue is opened for saving the pro tocol After saving it or cancelling saving the Exit GFF print save diagnostic protocol dialogue is re opened Reference See also Data chapter for detailed information on selecting the type of protocol and on saving the protocol Continue Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service continues to exit GFF Finally Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens the Send support request dialogue Here you again have the option of sending the diagnostic protocol with a support request c Send support request Please select an option ne or more errors occurred during the program sequence Add notes Cancel Send support request Figure 6 89 Support request Cancel The support request is cancelled and nothing is sent Send support request An automatic support request is sent with
301. surements In the case of a single measurement only one measurement option from function block 1 or 2 is active In the case of a parallel measurement one measurement option from function block 1 and one from 2 are active at the same time Ownote In the case of active parallel measurement both test results are output in the display area and the bar graph and minimum maximum function are not available In the function area the Minimum minimum button is hidden 9 2 1 Voltage measurement with the URDI measur ing lead 2 To activate the Voltage URDI measuring function use the button of the same name 203 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Oscilloscope Figure 9 5 Client area for activated Voltage URDI voltage measurement 2 The following test parameters can be set e Coupling DC voltage or AC voltage e DC voltage measuring range 2V 20V 50V e AC voltage measuring range 0 2V 0 20V 10 40V e Automatic or manual measuring range selection e Functions freeze frame minimum maximum calibration 9 2 2 Current measurement with the URDI measur ing lead 2 To activate the Current URDI measuring function use the button of the same name 204 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Osciloscope Figure 9 6 Client area for activated Current URDI current measurement 2 The following test parameters can be set e Coupling direct current or alternating current e Direc
302. t current measuring range 200mA 2A e Alternating current measuring range 0 200mA 0 2A e Automatic or manual measuring range selection e Functions freeze frame minimum maximum calibration 9 2 3 Resistance measurement with the URDI measur ing lead 2 To activate the Resistance URDI measuring function use the button of the same name 205 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Oscilloscope Figure 9 7 Client area for activated Resistance URDI resistance measurement 2 The following test parameters can be set e Measuring ranges 0 10Ohm 0 1000hm 0 1kOhm 0 10kOhm 0 100kOhm 0 1MOhm 0 10MOhm e Automatic or manual measuring range selection e Functions freeze frame minimum maximum calibration 2 Note If the measuring ranges 0 10Ohm or 0 100Ohm are selected manually calibration is necessary For this the red and black measuring probes need to be moved together A system message will then ask you to carry out further operating steps The message text Calibration in progress is shown in the display area during calibration ap Note Additional contact resistance up to the object being measured can be compensated for by means of manual cal ibration Due to a short circuit directly at the object being measured not only the measuring lead but also the supply lead to the object being measured are included in the calibration 9 2 4 Diode test with the URDI m
303. t view Under System environment details e the system path to the application directory is displayed e the software and data versions e the storage location of the diagnostic database DIDB DB Basis the ECF version e and the manufacturers and versions of the external diagnostic applications MCD Server and PDU API The data cannot be changed here The view is only for your information 276 Administration mode 2 General licence information This view shows all licence details General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand design Details about License information Variants Language Product Update Brands System logging german i License A Expiration date System environment Sarat number Global configuration Path GFF sequence Information Country code Licensed brand Volkswagen Nutzfahrzeuge Importer Dealer Dealer type Figure 11 9 Licence information view Part 1 General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand design Details about License information Licensed brand Volkswagen Nutzfahrzeuge Language Importer Update Dealer System logging Dealer type Licensed brand Audi ees System environment Importer Global configuration Dealer GFF sequence Genar type Hardware Hardware ID Tester type Launcher Version Figure 11 10
304. tent Block diagram Control unit list Event memory list Figure 6 44 Opening an event memory entry Double click on an event memory entry to open or close it If it is marked with a plus sign or a minus sign click on the plus s gn or minus sign to open or close it Details on the control unit are explained in the following figure 3 Gateway Diagnostic interface for databus 1KO907530L 0052 J533 Gateway HO 1K0907951 HO o Control module for navigation 8 CD mechanism J401 No signalicommunication Intermittent Standard environmental conditions Status 52 Date 14 06 41 00 00 2000 Mileage 3 km Priority 2 Frequency counter 2 Unlearning counter driving cycle 42 1304 4 Radio No signal communication Intermittent Figure 6 45 Information on an event memory entry The following information is available in the event memory entry according to the numbers Event code 80 Diagnostic mode Symptom code Event location Symptom Memory status Display You can use the Display button to switch between the two views The standard ambient conditions are displayed lout ambient condtions The standard ambient conditions are not displayed The standard environmental conditions provide information on the following Status Date and time of the entry Mileage Priority Frequency counter Unlearning counter driving cycle 2 Sorting To cha
305. test instructions Fuse assignment Documents connector view control module Documents harness connectors Figure 8 5 Example 1 document tree Show document Selection of Chassis Repair instructions Gen notes on line tests 184 Info mode PRno Documents Actions History Circuit diagrams Manuals Vehicle General Notes Regarding Wiring Tests Wiring test for open circuits Ignition off terminal 15 off Connector component is will be separated Control module connector is will be separated During the wiring test move the harness connector s connectors and wires and thus check if there is a loose contact or corrosion Wiring test of PIN wire start to PIN wire end OK lt 3 Ohm NOK The wire interruption must be fixed Subassembly electrical system Repair Group 97 Wire test for short circuit to each other 2 wires Ignition off Terminal 15 off Connector component is will be separated Control module connector is will be separated Check the harness connection s and connectors during the wiring test to ensure that no loose contacts or corrosion is present Wiring test of PIN wire 1 start or end PIN wire 2 start or end OK gt 9 MOhm NOK The short circuit in the wire must be fixed Subassembly electrical system Repair Group 97 Wiring test for short circuit to Ground GND lt Figure 8 0 Example 1 document view Example 2 of a combined text ima
306. the continuity test A frequency between 0 and 4000 Hz can be selected for the acoustic signal 2 Test instruments GDI components The version numbers of the GDI components used can be viewed here 2 Self test The self test action allows the self test integrated in the test instrument to be started The result is shown in the form of OK not OK indication on the screen 2 Target curve functionality After clicking on the target curve function action perform user authentication to activate Expert mode for the Oscilloscope target curve function A dialogue appears prompting you to enter the location ID and the corre sponding password in the text field Once this information has been entered correctly the Activate and Cancel buttons will appear If the target curve function has already been activated the Deactivate button appears instead of the Activate button 238 Test Instruments mode General Storage lacations Support Connections Test Instruments Test Instruments action Salf tast Details on Target curve function Target curve function To black the acvanced target curve function please click on Deactivate Deactivate Cancel Figure 9 27 Activating expert mode in the target curves function gt Reference See also chapter Target curves function 239 Chapter 10 Virtual keyboard manual 10 1 Installation Administrator rights are required for the installation The installer for the Virtual key
307. the readiness code Yes Click on this button to execute the test program for the readiness code No The program for the readiness code is not executed In the last program on the Process tab you will need to decide whether the diagnostic protocol is to be sent to support 112 Diagnostic mode Process Diagnostic protocol sending gt Done Continue Additional data Preparation steps This application sends the diagnostic protocol online or saves it on the tester Reading data lf the tester is not connected to the network the diagnostic protocol is stored and sent as soon as the tester is connected to the network Read VIN Protocols that have been stored and are more than 40 days old are automatically deleted Read VIN Additional data lt Figure 6 87 Send diagnostic protocol Send The diagnostic protocol is automatically sent to support if there is a network connection If there is currently no network connection the diagnostic protocol is saved and sent the next time Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is started Skip The diagnostic protocol is not sent After executing the end modules the Exit GFF print save diagnostic protocol dialogue appears which you can use to choose whether to print or save a diagnostic protocol Exit GFF print save diagnostic log To print or save the diagnostic log please press the corresponding button The Continue button is used to resume the diagnostic se
308. ther guided fault finding is to be used during a diagnostic session or not is also decided using the Basic Characteristics dialogue Vehicle identification automatic O manual VIN Decision o When guided fault finding is deselected only the guided functions and self diagnosis are available Do you wantto perform diagnasis without guided fault finding Working with guided fault finding cancel Figure 6 15 Query for guided fault finding With every diagnostic start up Work with guided fault finding is automatically set by default in the Basic vehicle characteristics dialogue If this option is deselected a warning is displayed with information about the consequences Only Self diagnosis and Guided functions are available Yes The diagnostic session is resumed without guided fault finding In this case work can only be continued without an order No Diagnosis is resumed using guided fault finding Reference For more information on self diagnosis see chapter Self diagnosis Vehicle identification for determining the GFF diagnostic data in the Basic Vehicle Characteristics dialogue can be performed automatically or manually Basic characteristics that are not determined clearly need to be identified manually If an error occurs during automatic identification a message is displayed with the request for manual identification of the vehicle 57 Diagnostic mode Identification error eo An err
309. tically set to 0 of the amplitude value 2 In auto measuring mode Click on the Auto button to start the measurement automatically when there is a valid trigger event corresponding to the set trigger threshold or after a delay time has elapsed which depends on the selected timebase Oxsote If no information about the signal is available use Auto measuring mode A signal curve is also output if the trigger is outside the amplitude untriggered display The trigger can then be guided manually to a value in the amplitude range to produce a frozen image 2 Recording measured values in normal mode Click on the Normal button for the cyclic measurement to be performed only if there is a valid trigger event Oxsote Normal measuring mode should be used only if there is exact information on the amplitude and frequency of the measuring signal A triggered signal curve is only output if the trigger is within the amplitude range of the signal 2 Recording measured values in single mode Click on the Single button to perform only a single measurement after a valid trigger event The signal is measured and displayed immediately as a freeze frame Make sure that there is a valid trigger event 221 Test Instruments mode 2 Recording measured values in draw mode Draw mode Click on the Draw button to perform the measurement without trigger The signal curve in the display area is displayed continuously from the left to the
310. tion The name of the control unit Part number The unique part number of the control unit Software version The current software version Workshop code The workshop code The main control unit addressed is displayed in the very top row of the table Further auxiliary control units that can be accessed via the main control unit are displayed in the following rows if available This is the wiper module in the example above To display additional identification characteristics select the respective entry in the table at the top For the information displayed in the table at the bottom the user can switch between the standard identification characteristics and the extended identification characteristics of the system selected above The Show extended 146 Diagnostic mode identification button is used for this purpose If it is confirmed the extended identification is displayed and the button is given the caption Show standard identification After selecting an entry from the upper table the standard identification is automatically displayed first 6 6 2 6 Measured values The control unit for which the selection has been made is shown in the upper left part of the tab The example shows the engine s electronics The Measured values tab has two views one for configuring the measured values to be recorded see figure at the top and one for displaying the test results After compiling the measured values to be displayed in the fi
311. tion status cannot be identified pp 55 6 12 Status areavexample determinin the VIN ee ea E ua N 56 6 13 GMD Execution sechHon aaa a 56 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 6 41 6 42 6 43 6 44 6 45 6 46 6 47 6 48 6 49 6 50 6 51 6 52 6 53 6 54 6 55 6 56 6 57 6 58 6 59 6 60 6 61 6 62 6 63 6 64 6 65 6 66 6 67 6 68 6 69 6 70 6 71 Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service User Manual Dialogue for selecting the basic vehicle characteristics pp 56 Query Tor 2ulded Tanke MMC a near ideales 37 Error donos automatic Identeca oN ee 58 Enterins the VIN Manaa eGo on eT a messen us Heike 58 Eos tO Group S yoe mS eol On Brise 60 Losinswindow Ao the GOUD Systems a anne at ar lee al 60 Scl chOrder see 0n gt Diagnose Stir UD ans une ea 61 Select order Sechion Flash SR 62 02 Loci to Gronp systems not Possible au an a a een 63 SEE 64 de 65 00 sclectimne Work without Order un tue TI an I ea Te ae 67 Identity Control Units SECON so Alan erkeuslens 68 Check installation list Haloshe a regia meena 68 Editino Ne COGING 69 OntoL nnits mot dentned 70 VEW Or he Control JIS 71 IH onatlon onac omrol nn a a ed de lets ana 12 SONO eG Otel nt NE 12 WO 73 Examples of the graphical displ
312. tton the first four measured values are shown in the display area 236 Test Instruments mode Multimeter Oscilloscope 10ms Div BWI 600 min 73 C 1 17 0 Figure 9 25 Displaying diagnostic measured values on the multimeter Multimeter Oscilloscope 600 Imin Figure 9 26 Displaying diagnostic measured values on the oscilloscope 9 5 Test instrument administration In Admin mode special test instrument settings can be configured Under the Test instruments and Test in struments action tabs the following actions are available for selection from the pop up menu 2 GDI device driver The corresponding GDI driver for the test instrument connected can be configured here If the desired driver is not displayed on the pop up menu check if the corresponding device driver was installed correctly 234 Test Instruments mode 2 Physical units This functions allows physical units to be defined for the var ous measured values of the stand alone test instru ments However the defined settings are not taken into account in guided fault finding The following physical units can be configured e Voltage V volt e Current A ampere e Resistance ohm e Pressure bar bar lb in pound per square inch e Temperature C degrees Celsius F degrees Fahrenheit 2 Signal generator The signal generator function allows settings to be configured for the duration and pitch of the signal for
313. ttps Wlocalcpn gateway testwob vw vwg services Group system eShop LSRREROROREROROREREREREREREROROREROREOREREN Group system DISS Mirror server 2 Figure 11 25 Carport Group system view The URL for vehicle data via which this service is accessed is entered under Group system details Carport Reset To reset previously saved changes to the default state click on the Reset button Discard To reset changes to the default state that have not yet been saved click on the Reject button Save To save your changes click on the Save button 2 Note If the URL is not entered correctly the Carport service cannot be accessed and no vehicle data is available 297 Administration mode 2 Connections Group system DISS The address for connecting to the Group system DISS is configured in this area Offboard Diagnostic Informa tion System Service specifies an address zi g sf Fe F 1 General Storage locations Support Connections Test instruments Test instruments Action Brand settings Details on Group system DISS Group system GFF Group system ElsaPro DissUrl https V VWlocalcpn gateway test wob vw vwag services Group system eShop Group system Carpo Group system DISS Mirror server 2 Figure 11 26 Group system DISS view The DissUrl for the Group system DISS via which complaints are transferred is entered under Group system details DISS Reset T
314. tus bit 137 Diagnostic mode 6 6 2 4 Default setting The configuration of the default setting and of the measured values to be displayed deviates depending on whether the function is executed on control units with KWP protocol or with UDS protocol 6 6 2 4 1 Default setting on KWP control units The steps for executing the Default setting function on a KWP control unit are explained below Results Orders Fracess Control units Dash Board WAP 2000 P207 sCogevoe X 716147007 Status No status information available Select function group Measured values for Default setting 1 Measured value name Value Unit Fun 2 a Read measured values Default setting Te BAS xt Figure 6 123 KWP default setting Read measured values Reads the measured values for a channel out of the control unit Default setting Configures the default setting for a channel In the list on the left the desired setting channel can be marked and thus selected by clicking on it The available channels are displayed in a list sorted in ascending order Multiple selection is not possible 254 channels are available per control unit All 254 channels are always displayed regardless of whether some of them are not being used by the current control unit If a channel that is not used is selected no measured values are displayed and no default setting can be configured for this channel either No cha
315. ues If that is not the case the error message described in step 3 appears and the write operation is cancelled 6 6 2 1 2 Control units with UDS protocol For UDS control units when switching from the Adaptation tab all available adaptation functions of the selected control unit are listed in a table They can be used to change the adaptation values of the control unit This ls illustrated in the following figure using the control unit with diagnostic address 17 instrument cluster dash panel insert Results Orders Control units i 17 Dash Board UDS ISOTP sCos20s 26 f 02067 017 EV kombi UDS VOD RMOS A0404 Adaptation parameter Current value Entry nit Distance ES Resetting ESI Language version 1 LN Sprachwarante German English I Seat belt warning Hour Portuquese Minute Fl l Display correction of fuel gauge Speed threshald of dynamic oil pressure warning ES Distance driven since inspection 17 CAL p 4 Figure 6 101 Adaptation UDS This is illustrated in the following figure using the control unit with diagnostic address 17 instrument cluster dash panel insert 17 KAL tab The table of adaptation functions has four columns Adaptation parameter The name of the adaptation function or parameter Old value The parameter value read out of the control unit Input The new parameter value To change the value click in the Input column of the desire
316. unit self diagnosis Vehicle self diagnosis Block diagram Control unit list Event memory list Figure 6 47 Context menu in the event memory view The buttons of the context menu are described in more detail in the Block diagram chapter gt Reference See also Block diagram chapter 82 Diagnostic mode 6 2 6 Starting guided fault finding GFF Once identification of the control units is completed guided fault finding can be started Diagnostic Start up Ldentificating Selecting an order control units Executing the Roan GMD Group i Syslems Figure 6 48 Start GFF section Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service opens the Diagnostic start up confirmation window with the message that guided fault finding GFF should be started Diagnostic start up OO Control unit identification completed Guided fault finding will be started following confirmation Figure 6 49 Starting guided fault finding OK Use this button for confirmation to start guided fault finding The next chapter describes the processes executed by Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service during guided fault finding in detail gt Reference See also chapter Using GFF 83 Diagnostic mode 2 Note If control units installed in the vehicle could not be identified it is possible to enter them in the block diagram or the control unit as installed select a variant if necessar
317. up Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 le lt Select Destination Directory Where should Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service be installed Si Select the Folder where you would like Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service to be installed then click Meist Destination directory Program Filest ffboard_Diagnostic_Information _ System Service Browse Required disk space 822 7 MB Free disk space 31 255 MB Figure 3 4 Target folder for installation The default target folder is C Programs Offboard_Diagnostic_Information_System_Service The path may be different for operating systems in other languages e g C Program Files Offboard_Diagnostic_Information_System_Service Back Go back in the installation process one step Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service is continued Cancel The installation is terminated Now the target directory for the diagnostic components MCD server MCD projects and PDU API needs to be specified 18 Installation amp Setup Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service 4 9 30 Mex Target directory of the diagnostic components N Select a directory CAODIS DIAG MODULES Figure 3 5 Target directory for diagnostic components The default target directory is C ODIS DIAG MODULES Back Go back in the installation process one step Continue The installation of Offboard Diagnostic Informati
318. upported The bar graph in the display area is centred in this case and thus divided into a positive and a negative area 2 Setting the AC coupling Clicking on the button activates AC voltage or alternating current measuring mode The bar graph in the display area ls left justified in this case 2 Setting the measuring range When starting a measurement option the automatic measuring range selection is active In this case the arrow buttons to the left and right of the measuring range display are not active and can therefore not be used J Measuring range button in AC automatic mode 202 Test Instruments mode To switch from automatic to manual measuring range selection click on the measuring range display button In this case the arrow buttons to the left and right of the measuring range display are yellow or green If the minimum or Maximum measuring range is reached the corresponding button is inactive black Measuring range button in DC manual mode Measuring range button in AC manual mode Onote In addition to the indication directly in the measuring range button the current measuring range is also shown in the display area on the left and right end of the bar graph s scale If the current measured value is not within the set measuring range characters are displayed if the range is exceeded and if it is fallen short of 2 Setting single measurements or parallel mea
319. ured value For control units with KWP protocol you can choose between selective and sequential actuator diagnosis The selection is set to Sequential by default Depending on the control unit not all diagnostic types are supported In this case the buttons are disabled Sequential Actuator code 123 mo Figure 6 133 Buttons for actuator diagnosis gt Starts actuator diagnosis 150 Diagnostic mode i gt Switches to the next actuator not supported by all control units a Stops actuator diagnosis If the user enters a numeric actuator code selective actuator diagnosis is automatically active If the user wants to switch back to sequential actuator diagnosis after entering a code the entered code must be deleted first Only then can Sequential be selected again It is not possible to select both sequential actuator diagnosis and an actuator code Only if one of the two options is selected and this is also supported by the control unit is the gt button enabled Click on this button to start actuator diagnosis 1 Selective actuator diagnosis KWP 1281 and KWP 2000 The actuator test is started and the text field for the actuator code is blocked until the function has been ended or cancelled 2 Sequential actuator diagnosis K WP 2000 only After starting the diagnosis of the first actuator the gt button and the text field for the actuator code are disabled until the function has ended itself or is cancell
320. uring range unit of meas div If the minimum or maximum measuring range is reached the corresponding button is disabled black The set measuring range is output together with the coupling in the colour of the respective channel in the display area channel A top left channel B bottom left 2 Setting the coupling To assign the desired measuring mode to the active channel click on the arrow of the Coupling pop up menu in the operating area The following test parameters are available e AC coupling against AC voltage With an AC coupling any DC voltage components of a measuring signal are blocked and only the AC voltage component is displayed That is practical if the DC voltage component of a measuring signal 1s much higher than the AC voltage component which would be falsified by the indicated value e DC coupling against DC voltage With a DC coupling DC and AC voltage components are displayed e GND ground coupling with earth The set coupling DC AC is output together with the measuring range in the colour of the respective channel in the display area channel A top left channel B bottom left 2 Setting the filter Click on the arrow of the Filter pop up menu in the operating area to assign the desired filter type to the active channel 218 Test Instruments mode The following filter types are available e OFF No filter is active e HE high pass filter Filters out everything below
321. vailable in electronic form click on the topic you require once in the table of contents to go directly to that chapter Table of Contents se 11 11 Notes GUS ERIN rence ee wee coe mer rr rc erry pea u ne Figure 1 3 Example of an active link in the table of contents 2 The blue push pin is usually used as a bullet or as a means of structuring the procedure within the system 2 Note The red pin the addition Note and the border for black and white printouts indicate particularly important information that must always be observed Note Additional information and useful tips are available below this symbol 13 Introduction Fonts All system components such as menus buttons and keys on the keyboard or touchscreen are displayed in bold This makes it easier to search within the manual and in Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service File names or paths are displayed in italics Example After clicking on the Start diagnosis button the vehicle s basic characteristics must always be selected The Basic vehicle characteristics dialogue appears References References within this manual enable you to go straight to linked or related topics They are also linked electron ically gt Reference The chapter entitled Name of the chapter also contains additional information 14 Chapter 2 System requirements To use Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service the following requirements must be
322. vel in service interval MAS00194 LN Volumen 2540 2560in20ml 1240 ml val gt mo 17 BAS x Figure 6 128 UDS default setting Configuration Name The name of the default setting measured value or group of measured values Value The measured value The actual default setting for the control unit is configured in this view A list at the top displays the default settings and closed by default to start with the corresponding measured values Click on to display these measured values The list at the bottom displays all global measured values and groups of measured values Measured values may be combined to groups In this case there is a in front of the group designator and the column on the right does not have any values Click on to open the group and display its measured values Click on in front of the group designator to close the group again The status of the currently selected default setting is displayed above the two tree structures in the UDS default settings Status field Some possible status indications may be active not active ended To start with the default settings to be configured need to be selected first For this you can select one or more default settings by clicking on them gt starts the configuration of the default settings fa stops the configuration of the default settings stops all active default settings 144 Diagnostic mode pi switches to the next de
323. vider Invalid sender e mail address identified ODS9106E Login to mail server failed Please correct your login name or password or contact the mail server administrator or your Please check the login name and or the pass provider word ODS9208E System for immobiliser adaptation FAZIT not Please try again later or contact Support available ODS9209E _ Fault candidates cannot be loaded Please try again later or contact Support ODS9210E System for coding System42 not available Please try again later or contact Support ODS9211E System for flashing System42 not available Please try again later or contact Support ODS9212E Login not possible No access to the dealer por Please try again later or contact Support tal ODS9213E The transaction cannot be completed The Group Please try again later or contact Support system is not available The data will be stored temporarily and sent au tomatically when the Group system is available again and Offboard Diagnostic Information Sys tem Service has been started on this computer ODS9214E Receiving system for key transponder not avail Please try again later or contact Support able The data will be stored temporarily and sent au tomatically when the Group system is available again and Offboard Diagnostic Information Sys tem Service has been started on this computer ODS9215E Receiving system for diagnostic protocol not Please try again late
324. x the error please contact Sup the application and restart it port ODS6504E A data adapter was not found therefore there Correct or update the installation is no database available Diagnosis will not be Please contact Support ODS7001E Database cannot be opened Please contact Support possible ODS7002E Please contact Support ODS7003E Please contact Support ODS7004E Please contact Support ODS7005E Please contact Support ODS7006E lInternal DB access error no primary key de Please contact Support fined for table ODS7501F The Diagnostic Information Database DIDB is Please contact Support not available ODS7502E Query to Diagnostic Information Database Please contact Support DIDB failed ODS7503E Update of the diagnostic database failed Diag Please contact Support nosis will be performed using the old diagnostic data Please contact Support ODS8001E Communication with vehicle interrupted Please check the connection to the vehicle or contact Support ODS8002E Error during communication with the control Please contact Support unit with control address 343 Error messages Please contact Support ODS8003E Operation on the control unit with the control ad dress was faulty Error message ODS8004E Unable to establish communication with the ve Please check the connection to the vehicle or hicle contact Support ODS8005E
325. y and then supplement them as diagnostic objects via the component selection gt Reference See also Identifying control units gt Reference See also Selecting a variant gt Reference See also Component selection 6 3 Test plan and special functions In the Test plan and special functions section start modules and traversion tests are executed the test plan is calculated automatically and adjusted manually via DISS and TPI if necessary At the end of this section the test plan and special functions are available for guided fault finding Ending Diagnosis Executing l Ending tests GFF Diagnostic start up starting GFF identificating control units Figure 6 50 Test plan and special functions section 84 Diagnostic mode 6 3 1 Start modules traversion tests test plan calcu lation This section describes how Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service executes start modules and traver s on tests and then creates the test plan _ Testplan and special functions Adjusting the test plar DISS TPE Figure 6 51 Start modules traversion tests test plan calculation section When guided fault finding is started start modules and traversion tests are executed on the Process tab These tests run in the background During a traversion test the control unit information read out is used to set the control unit variants If a variant c
326. yboard The progress dialogue displays the installation progress for all components of the update Progress Dialogue TTTTTTTTTTTT Extracting from archive DTC_Table_T xml Figure 4 5 Displaying the progress of a data update Cancel Installation of the data update is cancelled 35 Update 2 Note Depending on the data volume the data update may take some time During the update of applications from third parties individual installation routines may start with instructions that need to be followed If an update cycle was entered in Admin mode a corresponding message is displayed at the configured time when closing or starting Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service ee ac Time to check for updates OO Itis now time to check if updates are available To perform the check first connect to the update server Figure 4 6 Message relating to an update when the preconfigured time has passed This symbol a is used to refer to a pending update Click on the symbol to open the Time to check for updates message OK Updates are searched for via the configured connection If updates are available the system will inform you of this with the Updates available message Updates available a Updates are available To perform the update first end the diagnostic session and restart the application Figure 4 7 Message relating to an update when data is available OK Normally you can continue to

Offboard Diagnostic Information System Service User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents